High Power Phased Array and Tailored Gain Semiconductor Lasers - CaltechTHESIS
CaltechTHESIS
A Caltech Library Service
About
Browse
Deposit an Item
Instructions for Students
High Power Phased Array and Tailored Gain Semiconductor Lasers
Citation
Lindsey, Christopher Paul
(1987)
High Power Phased Array and Tailored Gain Semiconductor Lasers.
Dissertation (Ph.D.), California Institute of Technology.
doi:10.7907/9mh8-wv40.
Abstract
Most phase locked semiconductor laser arrays suffer from undesirable twin lobed farfield patterns, making them unsuitable for many applications. In this thesis we make a detailed theoretical and experimental study of this problem, and solve it by tailoring the spatial gain profile across the array. We demonstrate a
tailored gain chirped array
which emits 450
mW
into a single beam 3½° wide.
Stripe geometry lasers for use in phased arrays are examined in Chapter 2, as are design considerations for evanescently coupled phased arrays. A powerful numerical method for analyzing a nearly arbitrary one-dimensional dielectric waveguide with gain and/or loss is described.
Chapter 3 analyzes in detail the simplest array of two adjacent waveguides, both real index and gain guided and both weakly and strongly coupled. Chapter 4 discusses why a uniform array has a twin lobed farfield pattern, and introduces the concept of a nonuniform real index guided
chirped array
of lasers with widths which increase monotonically across the array. Real index guided chirped arrays can, in principle, be made to lase with a single lobed farfield pattern. Since such arrays are difficult to fabricate, and will be at least partially gain guided, we concentrate on gain guided structures. The combination of gain tailoring and a high interchannel gain in a proton implanted chirped array enables us to achieve our goal of fabricating a high power array with the single lobed farfield pattern described above.
Such arrays are actually
tailored gain broad area
lasers. Chapter 5 demonstrates another method for gain tailoring, the "halftone" process, which can create nearly arbitrary
two-dimensional
spatial gain profiles in an optoelectronic device, thereby offering a new degree of freedom to the designer of semiconductor lasers. Single lobed nearly diffraction limited beams from tailored gain broad area lasers 50µm wide are obtained.
Asymmetric tailored gain waveguides have several unusual properties. The technique of Path Analysis for analyzing these complex waveguides is introduced. Fundamental Fourier Transform relationships relating device structure to farfield patterns yield additional insights. Finally, we close with a measurement of the antiguiding parameter and briefly examine some design criteria for practical tailored gain broad area lasers.
Item Type:
Thesis (Dissertation (Ph.D.))
Subject Keywords:
Applied Physics
Degree Grantor:
California Institute of Technology
Division:
Engineering and Applied Science
Major Option:
Applied Physics
Thesis Availability:
Public (worldwide access)
Research Advisor(s):
Yariv, Amnon
Thesis Committee:
Yariv, Amnon (chair)
Bridges, William B.
Johnson, William Lewis
Rutledge, David B.
Cohen, Donald S.
Defense Date:
2 July 1986
Funders:
Funding Agency
Grant Number
ARCS Foundation
UNSPECIFIED
Office of Naval Research (ONR)
UNSPECIFIED
Air Force Office of Scientific Research (AFOSR)
UNSPECIFIED
NSF
UNSPECIFIED
NASA
UNSPECIFIED
Record Number:
CaltechETD:etd-03032008-143205
Persistent URL:
DOI:
10.7907/9mh8-wv40
Default Usage Policy:
No commercial reproduction, distribution, display or performance rights in this work are provided.
ID Code:
856
Collection:
CaltechTHESIS
Deposited By:
Imported from ETD-db
Deposited On:
04 Mar 2008
Last Modified:
16 Apr 2021 22:57
Thesis Files
Preview
PDF (Lindsey_cp_1987.pdf)
- Final Version
See Usage Policy.
9MB
Repository Staff Only:
item control page
CaltechTHESIS is powered by
EPrints 3.3
which is developed by the
School of Electronics and Computer Science
at the University of Southampton.
More information and software credits
HIGH POWER PHASED ARRAY
AND TAILORED GAIN SEMICONDUCTOR LASERS
Thesis by
Christopher Paul Lindsey
In Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements
for the Degree of
Doctor of Philosophy
California Institute of Technology
Pasadena, California
1987
(Submitted July 2, 1986)
Christopher Paul Lindsey
— iii -
Dedication
to
Yahweh
Who gave me strength
when I needed it most.
Seek first the Kingdom of Heaven and its righteousness,
and all else will be added unto you.
— Matthew 6:33
—iv—
Acknowledgments
I would like to thank my advisor, Dr. Amnon Yariv, for his support of my
work, and especially so during that trying period of time when more single lobed
farfield patterns were coming out of the computer models of arrays than came
from the devices themselves. I consider it a privilege to have been part of such an
exciting, dynamic, and prolific group as his.
I would like to express my great appreciation in particular to (the future Dr.)
David Mehuys. I have benefited greatly from our collaboration, and I sincerely
hope that he has enjoyed learning from me as much as I have enjoyed learning
from him. I wish — and expect — for him nothing but the best.
The early stages of this work were performed in collaboration with Drs. Yossi
Katz, Eli Kapon, and Shlomo Margalit. I would expressly like to thank Dr. Katz
for inviting me to join with him in his investigation of phased array semiconductor
lasers, and to Dr. Margalit for sharing his unwavering enthusiasm and prolific
outpouring of interesting ideas with me. Most of all, I am grateful to him for the
constant encouragement he gave me throughout our time together at Caltech.
I would like to acknowledge many very helpful discussions I have had with
Drs. Josi Salzman, Zeev Rav-Noy, Stephen Smith, Robert Lang, Kerry Valhala,
T. R. Chen, Christoph Harder, and (future Drs.) Michael Mittelstein and Pamela
Derry. I will miss the excitement of their company and look forward to their
continued success (and perhaps collaboration with them) in future years.
A word of thanks also to my Thesis Committee, Drs. Amnon Yariv, William
Bridges, William Johnson, David Rutledge, and Donald Cohen for taking the time
to read and critique my work.
-y-
The ability to quickly fabricate some unusual photolithographic masks played
a promenant role in several stages of this work. I would like to acknowledge and
thank Drs. David Rutledge, Dean Neikirk, and Chung-En Zah for the time and
effort they put into developing a very useful mask making facility.
The experimental work described in this thesis benefited greatly from the ex-
cellent and continuing efforts of Desmond Armstrong and Ali Ghaffari to improve
our epitaxial growth, fabrication, and testing facilities. Lou Johnson, Norm Kei-
del, and Larry Begay gave excellent assistance with machine shop work, while
Dana Roth was especially helpful with library matters.
A glance through this thesis will immediately reveal the importance of the
assistance I have received from the computing and graphics arts departments. I
would especially like to thank Albert Chang and Edith Huang at the Computing
Center for continually giving me cheerful and highly competent advice. Thanks
also to Glenn Gribble, Calvin Jackson, and Dave Gillespie for putting a lot of
work into developing the Chipmunk TX system which makes typesetting so easy
and fun. The beautiful figures interspersed throughout this work are the talented
artistry of Pat Marble, Bob Turring, Alejandro Soza, and Pat Lee. I thank them
for patiently enduring the many corrections and revisions I requested.
I would also like to take a moment to thank all the many unnamed support
staff, students, and faculty at Caltech who have, either directly or indirectly, made
my years here more pleasant and productive.
Although a Ph. D. thesis is necessarily a technical document, in my case it
would not have been possible without some outstanding support from some (rela-
tively!) nontechnical people. I would especially like to thank our group secretary,
Mrs. Jana Mercado, for her always encouraging words which helped me so much
during some discouraging times.
-vi-
It is not an easy thing to pursue a Ph. D. while supporting a wife and child, and
there is no doubt that I could not have done so without the help of Carol Mastin
and her friendly crew in the Graduate Office. I am deeply indebted (both figura-
tively and financially!) to them for their assistance with loans and fellowships. I
would also especially like to thank the women of the ARCS Foundation for their
very generous financial support during my years at Caltech, and to acknowledge
research support from the Office of Naval Research, the Air Force Office of Sci-
entific Research, the National Science Foundation, and the National Areonautics
and Space Administration.
Finally, I would like to thank some very, very special people without whose
behind-the-scenes support this work would not have been possible. To my par-
ents, many thanks for nurturing my early interest in science, for their never end-
ing support and encouragement over the years, and for giving me a “home away
from home” when I needed to get away from Caltech. To that very special man,
Dr. Robert Borrelli of Harvey Mudd College, I extend my great gratitude for hav-
ing faith and confidence in me, and for helping me begin to “see things in the soft
haze of a spring day” and to know that I could bring them to fruition.
And finally, to that most special, and most wonderful person of all, my dear
wife Yvonne: how can I thank her enough for her unfailing support, encourage-
ment, and love during what has been the most trying time of our lives together?
From the bottom of my heart I extend to her my very deepest gratitude and love,
and pray that God may richly reward her for her patience and perseverence.
To my son Gregory (and, someday, other children): may he come to discover,
as I have, that Physics is a whole lot of fun.
Thanks to all of you for making it possible.
— vii -
We grow great by dreams. All big
men are dreamers. They see things in
the soft haze of a spring day or in the
red fire of a long winter’s evening.
Some of us let these great dreams die,
but others nourish and protect them,
nurse them through the bad days till they
bring them to the sunshine and light
which comes always to those who sincerely
hope that their dreams will come true.
WOODROW WILSON
— viii -
Abstract
Most phase locked semiconductor laser arrays suffer from undesirable twin
lobed farfield patterns, making them unsuitable for many applications. In this
thesis we make a detailed theoretical and experimental study of this problem, and
solve it by tailoring the spatial gain profile across the array. We demonstrate a
tailored gain chirped array which emits 450mW into a single beam 34° wide.
Stripe geometry lasers for use in phased arrays are examined in Chapter 2,
as are design considerations for evanescently coupled phased arrays. A power-
ful numerical method for analyzing a nearly arbitrary one-dimensional dielectric
waveguide with gain and/or loss is described.
Chapter 3 analyzes in detail the simplest array of two adjacent waveguides,
both real index and gain guided and both weakly and strongly coupled. Chapter 4
discusses why a uniform array has a twin lobed farfield pattern, and introduces
the concept of a nonuniform real index guided chirped array of lasers with widths
which increase monotonically across the array. Real index guided chirped arrays
can, in principle, be made to lase with a single lobed farfield pattern. Since such
arrays are difficult to fabricate, and will be at least partially gain guided, we
concentrate on gain guided structures. The combination of gain tailoring and a
high interchannel gain in a proton implanted chirped array enables us to achieve
our goal of fabricating a high power array with the single lobed farfield pattern
described above.
Such arrays are actually tatlored gain broad area lasers. Chapter 5 demon-
strates another method for gain tailoring, the “halftone” process, which can create
nearly arbitrary two-dimenstonal spatial gain profiles in an optoelectronic device,
thereby offering a new degree of freedom to the designer of semiconductor lasers.
~ix-
Single lobed nearly diffraction limited beams from tailored gain broad area lasers
50um wide are obtained.
Asymmetric tailored gain waveguides have several unusual properties. the
technique of Path Analysis for analyzing these complex waveguides is introduced.
Fundamental Fourier Transform relationships relating device structure to farfield
patterns yield additional insights. Finally, we close with a measurement of the an-
tiguiding parameter and briefly examine some design criteria for practical tailored
gain broad area lasers.
Table of Contents
Acknowledgments ........ ccc ee ee tee eee eee eee ee eens
Abstract 2.0... cc ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee
Table of Contents... ee ee eee eee tee eee ee eens
List of Figures 2... . ce ee ee ee te nee teens
Chapter 1 Introduction and Overview ...............0 00055
Section 1.1 Historical Background ......... 0.00000 cece eens
Section 1.2 Semiconductor Lasers ........ 0... . eee ee eee eee
(a) Uniform Gain Broad Area Lasers .......... 00.0.
(i) The Filamentation Control Problem ..................
(ii) The Lateral Mode Control Problem .................
(b) Single-Element Stripe Geometry Lasers .............040.
(c) Phased Array Lasers 2.1... ce eee
(d) Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers «1.1... eee ee
Section 1.3 Applications and Future Extensions of This Work .......
Section 1.4 Conclusion ... 2... . cece ee eee ees
Section 1.5 Conventions Used Throughout This Thesis; References
Chapter 2 Stripe Geometry Single Element Lasers .........
Section 2.1 Introduction 2... 2.0... cece ee ee es
Section 2.2 Semiconductor Lasers for Use in Phased Arrays .........
(a) Buried Heterostructure Lasers «6. ee ee ees
(b) Burted Crescent (Channeled Substrate) Lasers ............
(c) Buried Ridge (Strip Loaded) Lasers .........---0++ e+ 00e-
(d) Air Ridge (Mesa Stripe) Lasers 6... i ee eee
(e) Proton Implanted and Schottky Isolated Gain Guided Lasers
Section 2.3 Interplay between Real Index and Gain Guiding .........
Section 2.4 Design Considerations for Evanescently Coupled Arrays
Section 2.5 The Helmholtz Equation ........... 00.000 ee ee eeee
Section 2.6 Symmetric Three Layer “Box” Waveguides ............
(a) Real Index Bor Waveguides «6... . cece cece eee eee
(b) Gain Guided Bor Waveguides .... 0... cee eee eee eee eee
(c) Path Analysis of Bor Waveguides «1.0.6.0... eee eee eee
Section 2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides ..........
Chapter 3 Two Coupled Lasers ............ 2... .02 00000
Section 3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides
(a) Calculation of the Phase Matching Wavelength ...........
(b) Comparison of the Coupled Mode Theory With the Exact Theory
Section 3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides
(a) Two Identical Waveguides .. 1.0... ec cee eee eee
(b) Two Nonidentical Waveguides ......--- 20ers sere eres
(c) Breakdown of the LCAO Theory .......-0 eee eevee eee
Section 3.3 Coupled Waveguides Without a Phase Matching Wavelength
Section 3.4 The Effect of Gain on Weakly Coupled Waveguides ......
Section 3.5 Strongly Coupled Gain Induced Waveguides ...........
(a) Two Coupled Multimode Real Index Guided Waveguides
(b) Leaky Modes of a Gain Induced Waveguide ........++.4-.
(c) Coupling Mechanism Between Gain Guided Lasers ........
(i) Experiment 1.0... 0.00 ccc eee eee
(ii) Theory... eee etn
86
89
91
93
— xii -
Chapter 4 Phased Array Lasers .................-020008.
Section 4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers ..........
Section 4.2 Chirped Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers ..........
(a) Limitations of Real Index Guided Chirped Arrays .........
Section 4.3 Uniform Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers ..............
(a) Box Modes and Array Modes... 1... ee eee
Section 4.4 Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers ..............
(a) Theoretical 2... ccc cc ee eee eee
(b) Experimental 0.00. eee eee
Section 4.5 Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays ........ bce eeeeeeeas
(a) Experimental 0... 0... ccc eee eee
(b) Theoretical ..........0000. ee eee eee
Section 4.6 Tailored Gain Phased Array or Broad Area Laser? ......
Section 4.7 Summary of Chapter 4 ....... 0... cc eee ee eee eee
Chapter 5 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers ..............
Section 5.1 Introduction ........ eee ee ee eee
Section 5.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental ........
Section 5.3 Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide ...............
Section 5.4 Path Analysis of the Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide
Section 5.5 The Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide ................
Section 5.6 Dispersion Equation and Eigenvalue Branch Structure
Section 5.7 The Airy Functions of Complex Argument ............
Section 5.8 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide
Section 5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues .........
Section 5.10 Nearfield Patterns 0... . 0... eee ee eee ee eee eee
Section 5.11 Farfield Patterns ........ 2.00 e eee et ee ees
— xili -
Section 5.12 Fourier Transform Symmetry Relations
Section 5.13 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter .......... 201
Section 5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers 205
Section 5.15 Conclusion .......... 0c cc eee ee ee eee een eens 211
Appendix The MODES Computer Program ............ 213
References ....0... 0... 00. cee eee ee ee et eee teen ne nena 218
— xiv -
List of Figures
Chapter 1. Introduction and Overview
Figure 1.1 Requirements for Laser Action ........... 0000 c cece eeeee
Figure 1.2 Laser Action in Semiconductors ............000000eeeeee
Figure 1.3 Broad Area Semiconductor Laser ............000000eeeae
Figure 1.4 Problems With Broad Area Lasers ...........0000 cee eeee
Figure 1.5 Stripe Geometry Semiconductor Laser ..... cebu ceeeeees
Figure 1.6 Uniform Array: Experimental ................0..0-0000%
Figure 1.7 Supermodes of Two Coupled Waveguides .................
Figure 1.8 Uniform Array: Theoretical .......... 0.00.00 cece eeuee
Figure 1.9 Tailored Gain Chirped Array .......... 00000 eeeeeeae
Figure 1.10 Halftone Tailored Gain Broad Area Laser ................
Figure 1.11 Optical Recording .......... ccc cece eee eee ee eee
Figure 1.12 Beam Steering via Gain Tailoring .................000.
Figure 1.13 Flowchart For Work Described in This Thesis .............
Chapter 2. Single Element Lasers
Figure 2.1 Buried Heterostructure Laser ......... 000s eee eeuues
Figure 2.2 Lateral Waveguide Model For a Buried Heterostructure Laser
Figure 2.3 Buried Crescent (Channeled Substrate) Laser .............
Figure 2.4 Buried Ridge Laser .......... 0. cece ee eee ens
Figure 2.5 Air Ridge (Mesa Stripe) Laser ...........--.. 00 e ee eee
Figure 2.6 Proton Implanted Laser ......... 0... e eee nees
Figure 2.7 Schottky Isolated Laser .. 1... . cece eee ene
Figure 2.8 Effect of Index Antiguiding in a Gain Guided Laser ......... 42
Figure 2.9 Equivalent Real Index and Gain Guided Waveguides ........ 44
Figure 2.10 Design Considerations for Evanescently Coupled Phased Arrays 46
Figure 2.11 Modes of the Real Index Box Waveguide ................ 52
Figure 2.12 Modes of the Gain Guided Box Waveguide ............... 53
Figure 2.13 Path Analysis For the Real Index Guided Box Waveguide .... 56
Figure 2.14 Path Analysis for the Gain Guided Box Waveguide ......... 57
Figure 2.15 Comparison of a High Order Real Index and Gain Guided Mode 59
Figure 2.16 Numerical Method for Complicated Waveguides ........... 60
Figure 2.17 Contour Plot for Locating Modes of the Dispersion Equation .. 65
Chapter 3. Two Coupled Lasers
Figure 3.1 Refractive Index Profile for Two Coupled Waveguides ........ 68
Figure 3.2 Supermodes Near the Phase Matching Wavelength .......... 72
Figure 3.3 Dispersion Curves for Two Slightly Different Box Waveguides .. 76
Figure 3.4 Exact Solutions Near the Phase Matching Wavelength ....... 77
Figure 3.5 Exact Solutions Far Away From the Phase Matching Wavelength 78
Figure 3.6 Cut-off of the Highest Order Supermode ................. 87
Figure 3.7 Two Strongly Coupled Real Index Waveguides ............. 92
Figure 3.8 Dispersion Curves for Various Coupled Waveguides ......... 94
Figure 3.9 Effect of Gain Mismatch on Two Phase Matched Waveguides .. 98
Figure 3.10 Effect of Gain on Two Phase Mismatched Waveguides ....... 99
Figure 3.11 Exact Solutions With Large Gain Mismatch ............. 101
Figure 3.12 Two Strongly Coupled Gain Guided Box Waveguides ...... 102
Figure 3.13 Two Coupled Double Mode Box Waveguides ............ 104
Figure 3.14 Leaky Modes of the Gain Guided Box Waveguide ......... 106
Figure 3.15 Standing Wave Patterns Between Gain Guided Lasers ...... 108
~ Xvi -
Figure 3.16 Variation of the Standing Wave Pattern With Coupling Current 110
Chapter 4. Phased Array Lasers
Figure 4.1 Supermodes of a Five Element Real Index Guided Uniform Array 117
Figure 4.2 Supermodes of a Five Element Real Index Guided Chirped Array 120
Figure 4.3 Limitations of Chirped Arrays ....... 0.0.00 e eee eeeeee 122
Figure 4.4 Variation of Index Step An With Etching Depth .......... 123
Figure 4.5 Effect of Gain on a Real Index Guided Chirped Array ...... 124
Figure 4.6 Supermodes of a Five Element Gain Guided Uniform Array .. 127
Figure 4.7 Comparison of Array, “Box Plus Array” and Box Modes ..... 129
Figure 4.8 Variation of Effective Index & Modal Gain in a Gain Guided Laser 131
Figure 4.9 Design of a Five Element Gain Guided Chirped Array ...... 132
Figure 4.10 Supermodes of a Five Element Gain Guided Chirped Array .. 134
Figure 4.11 Supermodes of a Five Element Strongly Coupled Chirped Array 137
Figure 4.12 Schematic Diagram of a Proton Implanted Chirped Array ... 139
Figure 4.13 Experimental Farfield Patterns for Gain Guided Chirped Arrays 141
Figure 4.14 Diffraction Limited & High Power Gain Guided Chirped Array 143
Figure 4.15 Gain Tailoring in Proton Implanted Chirped Arrays ....... 145
Figure 4.16 Lasing Mode For Various Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays .... 147
Figure 4.17 Supermodes of a Strongly Coupled Tailored Gain Chirped Array 150
Figure 4.18 “Offset Stripe”? Geometry Tailored Gain Chirped Array ..... 154
Chapter 5. Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
Figure 5.1 Graded Halftone Pattern 2.1... .. cee cee eee 160
Figure 5.2 “Halftone” Tailored Gain Broad Area Laser .............. 162
Figure 5.3 Experimental Near- and Farfield Patterns for the Halftone Laser 165
Figure 5.4 Modes of the Tailored Real Index Ramp Waveguide ........ 166
— xvii -
Figure 5.5 Airy Function of Real Argument ............0-+200000-
Figure 5.6 Path Analysis of the Tailored Real Index Ramp Waveguide .
Figure 5.7 High Gain Modes of the Tailored Gain Ramp Waveguide
Figure 5.8 Airy Functions of Complex Argument ..............000.
Figure 5.9 Asymmetric Tailored Gain Ramp Waveguide .............
Figure 5.10 Ratio of |Ai(z)| /|Bi(z)| for modes on the (+) Branch .
Figure 5.11 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Ramp Waveguide
Figure 5.12 Eigenvalues of Linear Tailored Gain Ramp Waveguide ......
Figure 5.13 Geometrical Construction to Determine the Peak Intensity x,
Figure 5.14 Coordinate Rotation for Calculation of Nearfield Pattern
Figure 5.15 Nearfield Patterns for a Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide ..
Figure 5.16 Nearfield and Farfield Patterns for all Branches ..........
Figure 5.17 The Effect of the Antiguiding Factor: Path Analysis .......
Figure 5.18 The Effect of the Antiguiding Factor on the Nearfield Patterns
Figure 5.19 Experimental Determination of the Antiguiding Factor .....
Figure 5.20 Light-Current Curves for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
Figure 5.21 Design Considerations: Gain Tailoring & Mode Discrimination
Figure 5.22 Effect of Gain Saturation .......... 0.0.0: ee eee eee
Figure 5.23 Design Tradeoffs For Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers .....
170
175
178
179
180
181
187
189
191
193
197
203
204
206
207
CHAPTER
ONE
Introduction and Overview
In five minutes you will say it is all so absurdly simple.
—Sherlock Holmes, The Adventure of the Dancing Men
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
§1.1 Historical Background
Laser action was first predicted by Schawlow and Townes in 1958,! and first
observed by Maiman? in the ruby system in 1960. In 1962, less than 2 years later,
stimulated coherent emission from semiconductor GaAs p — n junctions was first
observed nearly simultaneously by four groups.2—® Within six years, lasing action
had been obtained in a wide variety of semiconductor materials covering the wave-
length range between 0.54m to 20um. Semiconductor lasers were not capable of
room temperature operation until the introduction of the GaAs/GaAlAs hetero-
junction in 1969. Continuous Wave (CW) lasing of GaAlAs laser diodes at room
temperatures was not achieved until 197 0.7 Since then, progress has been exceed-
ingly rapid because of the tremendous commercial importance of semiconductor
lasers as highly efficient, compact, and inexpensive light sources, particularly for
use in optical fiber lightwave communication systems.
It is a tribute to modern technological research that in the fifteen or so years
since the advent of the first room temperature CW laser diode, the state of the art
has advanced enormously. Degradation rates of 10~®hr~! at 100°C temperature
and extrapolated lifetime in excess of 10’ hours at room temperature have been
—~Q-
§1.1 Historical Background
obtained.® Lasers that are capable of emitting up to 40mW into a stable beam with
a very narrow spectral linewidth are commercially available. Semiconductor lasers
are extremely efficient converters of electrical to optical energy. Differential power
efficiencies of 80% have been measured,? and threshold currents as low as 2.5mA
(corresponding to a power dissipation of 5mW) have been reported.!° Amplitude
and phase fluctuations in the best laser structures have been shown to be near the
quantum limit.1!
Naturally, no one laser design is capable of simultaneously achieving all of these
attributes. Since different. applications require different laser characteristics, de-
vice design has been directed towards specific applications. Historically, the most
important application is that of optical fiber communication. Lasers for fiber com-
munications require high modulation bandwidths with very clean beam profiles and
exceptionally pure spectral characteristics at wavelengths near the 1.5um absorp-
tion and dispersion minimum in silica glass fibers. GaAlAs lasers are unsuitable
for such applications due to their relatively short ~ 0.854m lasing wavelength, and
so most lasers intended for fiber communications use the InGaAsP system. As a
result of having been optimized for their spectral and modulation properties, such
lasers are limited to a few milliwatts of optical power output and have beamwidths
between 10° and 30°.
Recently, some potentially important applications of semiconductor lasers have
emerged which require substantially higher output power at GaAs wavelengths.
These include freespace nonfiber optical communication (e.g., between satellites
in space), optical disk recording, laser printing, and possibly even some medical
applications. Although probably not quite as large as the market for communi-
cations lasers, these latter markets are still substantial, and interest in achieving
-3-
§1.1 Historical Background
high power output, perhaps as great as several watts, is rapidly increasing. Fur-
thermore, it should be possible to concentrate this several watts of optical power
into a single narrow beam less than a degree wide.
However, there is an upper limit on the width of conventional semiconductor
lasers, and so several new approaches for achieving high power operation with
narrow beams have emerged within the past few years. Two of the most promising
include unstable resonator’? and phased array!3 semiconductor lasers. The latter
topic forms the subject of this thesis.
Phased array semiconductor lasers are fabricated by placing many single-
element lasers close enough together so that the entire assembly acts as one unit.
The first laser arrays were reported as early as 1968 by Birbeck,!* but the impe-
tus for their development did not really come until the team of Streifer, Scifres,
and Burnham at the Xerox Corporation made some major contributions to the
field.15-18 In 1983 this group set a high power record of 2.6W CW emission from
a laser diode which stood unbroken for many years.!® In 1985, Harnagel, Scifres,
et al. at Spectra Diode Laboratories broke the old record, reporting 5.4W of CW
power from a phase locked array.”°
Unfortunately, high power operation did not come without its price: almost all
of the arrays reported to date have suffered from double lobed farfield patterns.2):22
The two beams, typically separated by about ten degrees, make such arrays un-
suitable for many applications. As a result, substantial effort has gone into under-
standing the source of this problem and devising methods for its elimination.
Most of the early work on phase locked arrays used uniform arrays of identical
elements on equidistant centers. In 1984 Kapon, Katz, and Yariv at Caltech?%
introduced the concept of array supermodes, and showed that the twin lobed
farfield patterns were the result of the lossy interchannel regions inherent in the
-4-
§1.1 Historical Background
design of most uniform arrays. Kapon, Lindsey, et al. then proposed the concept of
nonuniform chirped arrays.*4 In mid 1984 Lindsey demonstrated the first chirped
array based on this principle, which was capable of nearly diffraction limited 2°
single lobed operation.2° About one year later, in mid 1985, Welch and Scifres
used a minor variation of this design, and achieved CW power outputs of about
AW into single lobed beams only one degree wide.2®
More recently, there has been a renewed interest in semiconductor lasers that
achieve high power, single lobed operation without resorting to either array or
unstable resonator structures. In particular, in 1985, Lindsey, et al. showed that
the nonuniform chirped array reported earlier might better be described as a broad
area laser with a nonuniform spatial gain profile.2” He then demonstrated a tatlored
gain broad area laser which achieved nearly diffraction limited single lobed, high
power (200mW into 23°) operation from a truly broad area laser about 50um
wide.28;29
The scope of this thesis therefore begins with a discussion of the reasons why a
uniform array has an undesirable twin lobed farfield pattern, proposes and demon-
strates nonuniform tailored gain chirped arrays, and concludes with a demonstra-
tion and analysis of tailored gain broad area lasers.
§1.2 Semiconductor Lasers
In order to achieve laser action, the three requirements, shown schematically
in Figure 1.1, must be met. First, it is necessary to provide a means of exciting
electrons into higher energy states more rapidly than the rate at which they decay
into lower energy states. In a semiconductor laser, this is achieved by sufficiently
forward biasing a p — n junction in a direct band gap material such as GaAs.29
~5-
§1.2 Semiconductor Lasers
-/-.
oPTicaL 4
BEAM E cartialty reflecting A
mirrors
© LIGHT
OUTPUT
FIGURE 1.1 Requirements for laser action.
The spontaneous and stimulated recombination of the electrons and holes at the
junction create photons, some of which escape the device in the form of useful
light output. Secondly, provision must be made for confining the light which
is generated so that the spontaneous emission rate is negligible compared to the
stimulated emission rate.*! In a GaAs laser this is achieved by means of a dielectric
waveguide®” formed by a GaAlAs /GaAs/GaAlAs double heterostructure. Finally,
it is necessary to provide optical feedback so that a stable optical mode can build
up in the device. In most semiconductor lasers, this is achieved by cleaving the
semiconductor crystal to form a Fabry-Perot cavity.?3
The GaAlAs/GaAs/GaAlAs heterostructure in the vertical direction is cre-
ated by sandwiching a thin (typically ~ 0.lum) GaAs active layer between two
Ga,_,Al,As cladding layers where z is typically ~ 0.2 — 0.4. To form the p—n
junction the upper GaAlAs layer is usually doped p type, the lower layer is n type,
while the active layer is often left undoped. Figure 1.2a shows that when the p—n
junction is forward biased, the smaller energy band gap of GaAs relative to that
of GaAlAs causes both electrons and holes to be confined to the thin GaAs active
—~6-
§1.2 Semiconductor Lasers
conduction band amend 22 ZZ.
| '
(A) | SSNS
valence band <<
| nt
\ |
(B)
refractive index | 2 !
Light intensity
(C) !
| N
optical field
GaAlAs | GaAs | GaAlAs
FIGURE 1.2 GaAlAs/GaAs/GaAlAs double heterojunction (a) band energy diagram for forward
biased p — n junction (b) refractive index profile (c) optical field intensity.
layer, thus leading to the very high inversion densities (t.e., gain) characteristic of
semiconductor lasers.
Figure 1.2b shows that since the index of refraction of the GaAs core region
is greater than that of the GaAlAs cladding, the double heterojunction not only
confines the carriers, but also forms a dielectric optical waveguide as well. In
general, such a dielectric waveguide can guide many optical modes.*4 The shape of
the optical mode is referred to as the mode’s nearfield pattern, while the radiation
pattern that this mode makes when it emerges from the laser is referred to as the
mode’s farfield pattern. Almost all applications of semiconductor lasers require a
clean, single lobed farfield pattern. This can be achieved by making the thickness
of the GaAs core region small enough so that only the fundamental mode in the
-~7-
§1.2 Semiconductor Lasers
vertical direction will be guided. Figure 1.2c shows schematically the mode shape
for the fundamental mode. We see that the optical energy is concentrated in the
high gain region of the waveguide. This combination of good carrier and optical
confinement makes possible the fabrication of semiconductor lasers capable of low
threshold, room temperature operation.
In order to achieve low threshold currents, it is necessary to confine the car-
riers and optical field in the longitudinal (along the junction plane), transverse
(vertical, perpendicular to the junction plane), and lateral (horizontal, parallel to
the junction plane) directions. In almost all semiconductor lasers, confinement in
the longitudinal direction is provided by the cleaved edge of the crystal, and in the
vertical direction by the heterostructure. Almost all the variation in semiconduc-
tor laser device design results from the many techniques for providing carrier and
optical confinement in the horizontal (lateral) dimension. Of particular interest to
this work are the various methods of providing lateral confinement for the optical
field.
(a) Uniform Gain Broad Area Lasers
The simplest laser based on these principles is the broad area semiconductor
laser, illustrated in Figure 1.3a, which has a untform lateral and longitudinal
spatial gain profile. No provision for lateral optical and carrier confinement is
made other than that provided by the edges of the wafer. Although such lasers
have the advantages of being very easy to fabricate and are capable of high power
operation, they are useless for almost all applications because, as illustrated in
Figure 1.3b, they have very wide, highly irregular, and unstable farfield patterns.
These undesirable farfield patterns result from two physical effects.
~8~-
§1.2 Semiconductor Lasers
(A) BROAD AREA SEMICONDUCTOR LASER
cleaved
mirrors
Cr/Au p-contact
p*-GaAs
cap layer
cleaved
mirrors
GaAs
active region
AuGe /Au
Light Output n-contact
many optical uncontrolled 444 current flow
modes filaments
(B) LATERAL FARFIELD PATTERN
(in junction plane)
15°
| | ! J I l ai | |
-20 -10 8) 10 20
FARFIELD ANGLE @
(degrees)
FIGURE 1.3 (a) Schematic diagram of a broad area semiconductor laser (b) typical farfield pattern
for a broad area laser ~ 504m wide. Compare with Figures 1.9 and 1.10.
-9-
§1.2(a.i) The Filamentation Control Problem
The Filamentation Control Problem
First, the presence of a nonlinear interaction between the carriers and the op-
tical field in a conventional semiconductor laser with a uniform spatial gain profile
produces filaments,®° so-called because a photomicrograph of an operating device
exhibits small areas of enhanced optical intensity with a filamentary structure.
(A) FILAMENTATION (B) LATERAL MODES
Gain
ch
Indext{ JL |
near field
Optical intensity amplitude farfield intensity
. ‘|
° Gain * * | \
Aa * >
; / yo \
fe) x
Du
it
o°
FIGURE 1.4 Problems with broad area lasers (a) filament formation (b) higher order lateral modes.
Since the real part of the refractive index is related to its imaginary part (t.e., the
spatial gain) through the Kramers-Kroenig® relationship, and also due to the free
carrier plasma effect,?” an increase in the gain at any point within the waveguide
produces a decrease in the real part of the refractive index; this is referred to as the
antiguiding effect.°° Conversely, if a small localized “hot spot” of increased optical
intensity should develop as a result of a fluctuation within the waveguide, the
increased stimulated emission will deplete the gain,°9 thus creating an tncrease
—~10-
§1.2(a.i) The Filamentation Control Problem
in the local index of refraction. As illustrated in Figure 1.4a, this interaction
effectively forms a small waveguide 3 to 12um wide*® within the larger waveguide
defined by the entire broad area laser.
As a result of the translational invariance within a conventional uniform gain
broad area laser, the filaments become unstable and move about randomly. The
complicated motions and interactions of the many filaments in a conventional
uniform gain broad area laser are one cause of the poor beam quality characteristic
of these devices. If a broad area laser’s farfield pattern is to be improved, some
method of stabilizing the filaments must be found. In conventional semiconductor
lasers, this is usually achieved by making the laser’s width narrow enough, typically
less than at most ten to fifteen microns, so that only one filament can form.
The second problem that must be overcome in a broad area laser comes about
because the optical field must be guided in the horizontal (lateral) direction as
well as the vertical one. Since the width of a typical broad area laser is perhaps
50 to 100 times the lasing wavelength, the lateral waveguide in a broad area laser
will support many lateral optical modes. In a conventional broad area laser in
which the current injection throughout the device is untform, only the lateral
fundamental mode will have a predominantly single lobed farfield pattern. (82-6)
This is illustrated schematically in Figure 1.4b, which shows the waveguide model
of a dielectric waveguide that supports two guided modes. (The mode shapes in
a gain guided waveguide are very similar; see §2.6(a).) The lasing of the higher
order modes thus increases the width of the farfield pattern, possibly making
it multilobed. To make the laser’s farfield pattern single lobed and diffraction
limited (1.e., as narrow as possible), the fundamental mode must be the only lasing
-~li-
§1.2(a.li) The Lateral Mode Control Problem
mode. All other modes must be suppressed. This is not possible in conventional
broad area lasers due to the nearly uniform spatial gain profile. Therefore, the
conventional method of achieving single lobed farfield operation is to make the
laser narrow enough so that the waveguide supports only the fundamental mode,
making it the sole lasing mode.
(b) Single Element Stripe Geometry Lasers
We see that the twin problems of filamentation and lateral mode control may
be solved by the simple expedient of limiting the width of the laser, typically to
5um to 10um. One type of stripe geometry laser diode is illustrated in Figure 1.5a;
it is similar to the broad area semiconductor laser of Figure 1.3a except that the
surface resistivity of the entire wafer has been increased everywhere but along a
thin stripe by implanting high energy protons into the surface of the crystal.
(A) (B)
a H* implantation
50°
i L. 4 l ] 1 bn
+10 0 10
e239 current flow FARFIELD ANGLE 6
| be 10°-30 V4 (degrees)
FIGURE 1.5 (a) Proton implanted stripe geometry semiconductor laser (b) typical farfield pattern
for a strip geometry laser ~ 54m wide.
~12-
§1.2(b) Single Element Stripe Geometry Lasers
Thus current is injected only into the narrow stripe. The optical field is then
confined in the horizontal direction by the presence of the lossy unpumped GaAs
active region at the edges of the stripe.
Since unprotected GaAlAs laser mirrors cannot sustain an incident power den-
sity greater than about 5MW/ cm? without damage,*° limiting the width of the
laser stripe also limits the laser’s maximum power output to ~ 50mW and, as
shown in Figure 1.5b, also limits its minimum beamwidth to ~ 10°. New semicon-
ductor laser designs which achieve high power operation by increasing the laser’s
width must therefore solve both the filamentation and lateral mode control prob-
lems.
In this thesis, we are particularly interested in phased arrays of semiconductor
lasers that use single-element stripe geometry lasers as building blocks to form
the array. We therefore lay the groundwork for our discussion of arrays with a
discussion of some simple waveguide models that describe a semiconductor laser.
A waveguide in the lateral direction may be formed either by variations in the real
part of the index of refraction (real index guided) or by variations in the spatial gain
distribution (gatn guided). We consider several classes of laser structures based on
the strength of real index guiding which are candidates for use in phased arrays
in §2.2. Due to some fundamental and technological constraints, practical evanes-
cently coupled phased arrays are either gain guided or at best very weakly index
guided (§2.4). However, since such structures are notoriously difficult to analyze
analytically, we proceed by breaking the problem down into smaller, more man-
ageable parts by starting with simple waveguides and gradually working towards
more complicated structures.
In §2.6 we briefly review the properties of the simplest of all possible dielectric
waveguides, the symmetric three layer slab structure which forms the basic building
~13-
§1.2(b) Single Element Stripe Geometry Lasers
block we will use throughout this thesis. Although other, more accurate modes
for gain guided lasers have been introduced,°*:4! this simple “box” waveguide has
the great advantage that it may be used to display the essential physics without
undue mathematical and computational complexity. Many of the other types of
waveguides we will encounter have such complicated refractive index and gain
profiles that their analytical analysis becomes intractable. We therefore introduce
some very simple yet powerful numerical methods for finding the optical modes of
a nearly arbitrary waveguide in §2.7, and make extensive use of these methods in
Chapters 3 and 4.
(c) Phased Array Lasers
As noted in §1.1, one promising method of achieving high power semiconductor
laser operation is to place many lasers in close proximity so that their optical fields
overlap sufficiently to bring about “phase locking.” In a phase locked array, the
optical fields of each laser add coherently, thus potentially providing the dual
benefits of high power and narrow beamwidth operation.
Figure 1.6a&b shows the simplest example of a phased array semiconductor
laser, the untform array, which is formed by placing several identical lasers on
uniformly spaced centers. Increasing the number of lasing elements obviously will
increase the optical power output, and will also decrease the beam angle into
which it is emitted because of the inverse relationship between the width of the
nearfield and farfield patterns.4?:43 In such phase locked semiconductor laser arrays
the filamentation problem has been solved by confining the filaments within the
individual laser channels that comprise the array.
—~14-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
(A) (C)
d*9um
SS
FAR FIELD PAK
py UNLOCKED 10°
~ye
diffraction
limited
controlled
filaments
(B) (D) d* Gum
10 lasers
ANTI -PHASE
L I. L
AL 1
GaAs SUBSTRATE -20 -10 i} 10 20
FARFIELD ANGLE @ (degrees)
FIGURE 1.6 Uniform array of semiconductor lasers (a) proton implanted (b) air ridge (mesa
stripe). Problems with phased arrays (c) not phase locked (wide farfield pattern) (d) anti-phase
operation (twin lobed farfield pattern).
However, most uniform arrays suffer from a fundamental problem that makes
them unsuitable for many applications. Figure 1.6c&d illustrates the two diffi-
culties with the uniform array that motivated the work described in this thesis.
First, Figure 1.6c shows that, if the laser elements comprising the array are too far
apart, the lasers do not lock in phase and the optical fields add incoherently.44*°
The emitted beam then has the same width as that of an individual laser. This
implies that the laser elements must be more closely spaced. Second, if the spacing
between the elements is decreased, the lasers lock in phase (as evidenced by the
narrower beam and deep minima between them in Figure 1.6d), but the farfield
pattern is now twin lobed. These undesirable twin lobed farfield patterns have been
found in uniform arrays with a wide variety of single-element laser designs, and
thus appears to be a property of the uniform array structure itself and not of the
-15-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
individual lasers. Understanding the cause of this problem and demonstrating a
method of eliminating it form the core of this thesis.
Comparison of the uniform array’s experimental farfield pattern of Figure 1.6d
and the vy = 2 theoretical farfield pattern of Figure 1.4b suggests that the twin
lobed farfield pattern may be due to a high order lateral waveguide mode. We are
therefore led to consider waveguiding properties of arrays of box waveguides. One
of the very simplest possible arrays consists of two box waveguides placed suffi-
ciently close so that their evanescent fields overlap and the lasers phase-lock. The
detailed analytic study of these coupled waveguides forms the subject of Chapter 3.
Weakly coupled real index guided waveguides are studied with the help of coupled
mode theory in §3.1, while strongly coupled waveguides are considered in §3.2.
Coupled mode theory predicts that if the two individual waveguides are single
mode, then the composite system will support two “supermodes.”? In §3.2(a) we
find (and explain) the interesting result that when the spatial overlap between the
elemental fields becomes large, one of these supermodes disappears, leaving only
a new single mode system.
Central to the understanding of systems of coupled waveguides is the concept
of the phase matching wavelength(3-1) From the point of phased array semicon-
ductor laser design, the primary significance of the phase matching wavelength is
that at this wavelength equal power flows in each waveguide (t.e., the admizture
factor is unity). In §3.3 we show that not all coupled waveguides will have a phase
matching wavelength, and in §3.1(a) we present a simple method of designing a
two waveguide system around a predetermined phase matching wavelength (e.9.,
the peak in the spectral gain curve of GaAs).*%.47
~16—-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
Coupling between two waveguides is illustrated in Figure 1.7. Figure 1.7a
shows the nearfield and farfield patterns for two closely spaced identical real in-
dex waveguides —1.e¢., a two-element uniform array. We find that if we assume
that each of the individual waveguide channels supports only the fundamental
mode, the composite structure supports two supermodes which we label the v = 1
(++) and v = 2 (+—) supermodes, where (++) refers to the inphase addition of
the individual modes and (+—) refers to antiphase addition. Notice that if the
gain is concentrated in the core regions (as indicated by the hatched ovals), the
interchannel region between the waveguides is relatively lossy.
(A) IDENTICAL (B) NONIDENTICAL
Gain =~ Sain
eg
GD ae
lp CD
Index f J index |
™Loss
cs
N,
Oss
nearfield amplitude farfieid intensity near field farfieid
| |
+\ | - |
yA
ge
INTENSITY
ae
al
FIGURE 1.7 (a) Supermodes of two identical coupled waveguides. The lossy interchannel region
causes the high order (+—) supermode to lase, leading to a twin lobed farfield pattern. (b)
Supermodes of two nonidentical coupled waveguides. Greater gain in the left channel than in the
right one favors the fundamental (++) supermode, potentially leading to a single lobed farfield
pattern.
-~17-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
Since the twin lobed (+—) supermode has a null in the lossy interchannel
region, it will be relatively more concentrated in the high gain channel regions
than will the single lobed (++) mode; it therefore will be amplified more as it
travels down the guide (1.e., it has a higher modal gain) because it is attenuated
less by the lossy interchannel regions. The mode with the highest modal gain will
be the lasing mode at threshold, and thus near threshold, the farfield pattern will
be twin lobed. The above threshold behavior is very complicated, and must be
solved using the rate equations.4® This latter topic is beyond the scope of this
work.
We find it interesting to note that the very feature which makes good single
lasers with low threshold currents (t.e., placing the gain where the light intensity
is greatest) is the very cause of the undesirable twin lobed farfield patterns in a
uniform array.
Figure 1.7b shows the supermodes for two phase mismatched nontdentical
waveguides which have the same index step but different widths. As before, we
have a (++) and (+—) supermode with single and double lobed farfield patterns
respectively, but now we notice a difference between the (++) and (+—) super-
mode: the (++) supermode is more concentrated in the wider guide, while the
(+—) supermode is more concentrated in the narrower guide. (83-3) Thus, if it were
possible to have more gain in the wider laser than in the narrower (as indicated by
the differently sized hatched ovals), the (++) supermode should have the greatest
overlap with the gain distribution, and would then be the lasing mode — leading
to a single- lobed farfield pattern. |
Although the presence of gain has been indicated only schematically in Fig-
ure 1.7, we are able to examine its effects on the admixture factor for both weakly
and strongly coupled waveguides. For the weakly coupled case (§3.4), the major
—~18-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
effect is that if the gain mismatch between the two waveguides is sufficient, equal
power will never flow in each waveguide, even at the phase matching wavelength.
For the case of two strongly coupled gain induced waveguides (§3.5), we find the
surprising and unexpected result that while we might expect to find either one or
two supermodes for two coupled single mode waveguides, we actually find four.
We discuss this interesting result in terms of gain guided “leaky” modes in §3.5(b)
and the special nature of the complex coupling between two gain guided lasers in
§3.5(c).
In Chapter 4 we utilize the ideas of Chapter 3 in our quest to design and
fabricate a phase locked array with a single lobed farfield pattern by using a
nonuniform array structure based on the idea of Figure 1.7b. Chapter 4 tells how
the actual implementation of these ideas into a working device came to resemble
a rather exciting detective story which starts with the single clue of two phase
mismatched waveguides, and evolves as we work out its extension to more elements,
discover the limitations of the theoretical results of Chapter 3, modify our ideas,
and try again — and again... until we finally arrive at a working device. Along
the way, we will also discuss a variety of waveguides relevant to phased array lasers
so that the reader will emerge (we hope) with a good understanding of the lateral
mode control problem in evanescently coupled phased array semiconductor lasers.
We start our discussion of multi-element arrays by considering a uniform array
in §4.1 and real index guided nonuniform chirped arrays in §4.2.
Figure 1.8a shows the nearfield patterns for a five-element uniform array. Notice
that the envelope function (shown by the dashed line) for the vy = 1 (+ + +++)
supermode is identical to that of the vy = 5 (+ —+—-+) supermode, and as in the
case of the two-element laser, the two modes differ only in the lossy interchannel
~19-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
(A) (B) (C)
UNIFORM ARRAY CHIRPED ARRAY CHIRPED ARRAY
NEARFIELO NEARFIELD FARFIELD
pW TQ Dees uniform array
LJ ,u ud ——
wide —nerrow
taser — iaser
envelope
f hon--
uncho .
vel
fundamentai
supermode
5 + + + + + n°
Yn
2 y=5
a nhighest order
supermode
+ = + = + 0°
LATERAL DIMENSION LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE
FIGURE 1.8 Supermodes of real index guided arrays (a) uniform array (b) chirped array (c)
farfield patterns for the chirped array. (The farfield pattern for the uniform array is very similar.)
region, thus implying that the twin lobed vy = 5 supermode will be the lasing mode.
This explains the twin lobed farfield patterns of the uniform array of Figure 1.6c.
Figure 1.8b shows the nearfield pattern for a nonuniform chirped array in
which the width of the laser waveguides decrease linearly from left to right. Now
we observe a great change in the envelope functions of the fundamental vy = 1 and
highest order antisymmetric vy = 5 supermodes: the fundamental supermode is
localized at one side of the laser, while the highest order antisymmetric supermode
is localized at the other. If it were possible to tailor the spatial gain profile to have
approximately the same shape as the fundamental supermode, that mode would
— 20 -
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
become the lasing mode because it best utilizes the available gain, thus yielding
an array with the desired single lobed farfield pattern.
Prior to this work, there was no known way to easily tailor the spatial gain
profile within a semiconductor laser array without using complicated multilevel
metallizations.49 The invention of two different methods for easily achieving such
gain tailoring in §4.5(a) and §5.2 forms one of the major contributions of this
thesis.
Although we have described the concept of a nonuniform array in terms of a
real index guided structure, in §4.2(a) we show that a real index guided chirped
array suffers from some fundamental and technological limitations which make its
fabrication exceedingly difficult, if not impossible. Consequently, towards the end
of Chapter 4 we turn our attention to arrays of nonuniform gain guided lasers and
discover that gain tailoring may be easily achieved in a chirped array of proton
implanted lasers.(84-5(2)) We are thus led to the concept of the tailored gain chirped
array presented in Figure 1.9. However, as shown in Figure 1.9a, in order to achieve
the desired single lobed farfield pattern, it is necessary to make the interchannel
gain so large that the coupling between the array elements becomes so strong that
the distinction between an array and broad area laser becomes blurred .(84-5(6),4-6)
Figure 1.9b demonstrates a tailored gain chirped array with a 1.5° wide single
lobed diffraction limited beam; other devices were capable of high power (450mW
into 3}°) essentially single lobed operation. (§4-5(6))
We have therefore achieved our goal of demonstrating a semiconductor laser
array capable of single lobed high power operation.
~21-
§1.2(c) Phased Array Lasers
TAILORED GAIN CHIRPED ARRAY
(A) LOW INTERCHANNEL GAIN (B) HIGH INTERCHANNEL GAIN
Ht- implant
Sym f Ht implant 2. Sum /\
sams eo A em i a a = Sum
o.3umt SS S Ss SS iam
nt-GaAs n*-GaAs
5 |
2 |
3 |
: |
Ee h | |
rp) | |
ai
is i \ |
-20 -I0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 -20 -I0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
LATERAL DIMENSION (um)
i L
Lo
30 “26 =10 0 10 “30 “30 76 6 10 20 30
INTENSITY (arb units) —»
FARFIELD ANGLE @ (degrees)
FIGURE 1.9 Tailored gain chirped array with (a) low interchannel gain (b) high interchannel gain
showing diffraction limited single lobed farfield operation.
—~22-
§1.2(d) Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
(d) Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
It is interesting to note that although the schematic diagram of the strongly
coupled tailored gain phased “array” of Figure 1.9b superficially resembles an
array, examination of its gain profile via the spontaneous emission pattern below
threshold reveals that the effect of the array has been nearly, if not completely,
obliterated by current spreading in the upper cladding layer between the channels.
Therefore, in §4.6 we consider whether or not it is actually more proper to refer
to such a device as a tailored gain broad area laser rather than as an array.
However, it is possible that, despite the beneficial effects of the gain tailoring,
the improved performance was due to some residual effect of the array structure.
In Chapter 5 we propose, demonstrate, and analyze a very versatile innovation, re-
ferred to as the “halftone process,” for achieving nearly arbitrary two-dimensional
spatial gain profiles within an optoelectronic device such as a broad area semicon-
ductor laser and use it to fabricate an entirely new type of semiconductor laser, a
tailored gain broad area laser, in which all traces of the array structure have been
removed.(§5-2) This laser is illustrated in Figure 1.10a. The various sized black
dots represent areas on the surface of the laser where current is injected, while
the white regions represent insulating regions. (82-2(¢)) As may be seen from this
figure, the fractional surface coverage of the injecting contact decreases approxi-
mately linearly across the laser, and so, to a first approximation, does the injected
current density and hence spatial gain profile. This is confirmed by a plot of the
nearly linear, highly asymmetric spontaneous emission pattern below threshold in
Figure 1.10b. Figure 1.10c presents the single lobed farfield pattern of this laser
which was nearly 50um wide and emitted 200mW into 2.3°.
Chapter 5 also contains a discussion of the optical modes of a linear asym-
metric tailored gain waveguide. We introduce the method of Path Analysis29 for
—~ 23 -
§1.2(d) Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
p*GaAs
HALF TONE (A) Haiftone pattern
TAILORED GAIN Cr/Au
BROAD AREA LASER
Active
Region
(C)
Sym
AuGe/Au
2.3° 4 current flow
200 mw $y
; ¢-- minimum
hae conn maximum
3.2] th (B)
‘€
18° > O.7I ty
wo
Zz
tid
2.21 hh 5 i 1 i ! 1 r
—= (5 ie) 15 30 45 60
LATERAL DIMENSION (pm)
! —_ i a 1
-30 -15 ° 15 30
FARFIELD ANGLE @ (degrees)
FIGURE 1.10 Halftone tailored gain broad area laser (a) schematic plan view (b) spontaneous
emission below threshold showing asymmetric linear spatial gain profile (c) farfield pattern, showing
high power single lobed farfield operation.
—~24-
§1.2(d) Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
analyzing nonuniform gain induced waveguides which greatly eases the analysis of
these structures, and makes possible the calculation of many waveguide properties
using only simple algebraic and geometric arguments. ($2-6(c),5.4,5.8) We find that
the modes of asymmetric tailored gain broad area lasers have several very inter-
esting properties. First, the mode discrimination (t.e., difference in the modal
gains) between the fundamental and other higher order modes is much better than
it is in a uniform gain waveguide. (85-6) Second, it is well known that symmetric
waveguides and real index waveguides have higher order modes with nulls in the
nearfield patterns. (84-2) This is not true for asymmetric tailored gain waveguides.
The nearfield patterns of the modes of this latter structure all null-less. (85-19) py.
nally, the higher order modes of either symmetric or real index guided waveguides
have multilobed farfield patterns, (84-2) while all of the modes of a linear asymmet-
ric tailored gain waveguide have single lobed farfield patterns. (85-11) We show that
these unusual properties result from the complex nature of the electric field made
possible by gain guiding and the lack of left-right inversion symmetry in the asym-
metric tailored gain structures.(85-12) We then discuss the effect of these unusual
properties on device design, and briefly present some of the engineering tradeoffs
involved in designing tailored gain broad area lasers. (85-14)
In this work, we consider only asymmetric tailored gain waveguides for two rea-
sons. First, although higher powers may, in principle, be obtained from a symmet-
ric structure with twice the width of an asymmetric one, the available experimen-
tal evidence suggests that asymmetric structures show better single lobed farfield
operation at higher powers than do their symmetric counterparts.©°Second, asym-
metric gain induced waveguides have properties very different from other, more
commonly known, structures. We therefore concentrate on asymmetric structures,
~25-
§1.2(d) Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers
and remark that the extension of this work to symmetric waveguides is straight-
forward.
§1.3 Applications and Future Extensions of This Work
Halftone tailored gain broad area lasers are very simple to fabricate, and are
thus well suited to large scale processing techniques. We anticipate that they may
find application wherever high power single lobe operation of a laser is desired,
provided that the lack of spectral purity associated with gain guided lasers is not
objectionable.
DETECTOR READ
——> SIGNAL
OUT
LASER
WRITE DIODE =
sicnai —{_}
IN
BEAM
COLLIMATING
LENS SPLITTER
FOCUSING
LENS
INFORMATION
ENCODED IN
PITS ON THE
DISC
FIGURE 1.11 Optical recording.
Figure 1.11 shows a possible application of asymmetric tailored gain broad
area lasers to optical data recording. A semiconductor laser and detector is used
to measure the amount of light reflected from microscopic pits on the surface of the
disc. In optical data recording, it is necessary to steer the laser beam to the correct
— 26 -
§1.8 Applications and Future Extensions of This Work
track on the optical disc. A closed loop servo mechanism is used to insure that
the optical beam will stay centered on the track even if it is not exactly concentric
with the axis of rotation. Conventionally, this is done using electromechanical
techniques. Figure 1.12 shows how the beam emission angle from an asymmetric
tailored gain broad area laser depends on the value of the spatial gain gradient.
However, it should be possible to utilize asymmetric tailored gain broad area lasers
to electronically steer the laser beam onto a track much more rapidly than with
conventional electromechanical methods.
(a) (b)
ar - -
- “ie BEM Yam a
> E
seseeT
{20pm i
Lateral dimension x canal !
fe) \ 2 3 4 5 6
FARFIELD ANGLE @
(degrees)
FIGURE 1.12 (a) Tailored gain broad area waveguides with varying gain gradients (b) farfield
patterns showing potential for beam steering.
Although electromechanical methods would probably still be required for gross
positioning of the beam, the ability to rapidly adjust the precise position of the
beam, combined with the high power output of a tailored gain broad area laser,
could potentially increase the optical bandwidth of the unit. Thus, we anticipate
that asymmetric tailored gain broad area lasers merit further development work.
~I27-
§1.4 Conclusion
§1.4 Conclusion
In conclusion, we have come full circle. We started by stating that a uniform
gain broad area laser was unsuitable for many applications due to the filamentation
and lateral mode control problems. The filamentation problem was solved by using
an array structure, while the lateral mode control problem was solved by intro-
ducing gain tailoring. However, we discovered that in order to make gain tailoring
work, it was necessary to increase the interchannel gain to the point where the
device resembled a broad area laser more than it did an array. We then demon-
strated a tailored gain broad area laser (!) which is capable of single lobed, high
power operation.
It is interesting to note that, although we began by assuming that an array
was necessary for high power operation, we have found that the introduction of
gain tailoring makes the array structure superfluous. In fact (as we will show
in §4.5(b)), it may be that since the modulation of the laser’s nearfield pattern
introduced by the array structure increases the power present in the sidelobes and
decreases the ability of the device to operate in a phase locked mode, it may well be
advantageous to consider other structures which resemble broad area lasers more
than they do arrays of individual lasers. In particular, it would be very interesting
to combine the present work with gain tailoring with new methods of tailoring
the real part of the refractive index to create tatlored indez tailored gain broad
area lasers that would potentially combine some of the benefits of both real index
and tailored gain structures. Furthermore, in one sense what we have done in this
thesis is essentially to redefine the maximum upper width of a semiconductor laser
from 10um — 154m to perhaps 60um — 100um. One might then speculate about
the possibility of creating arrays of broad area semiconductor lasers!
~ 28 -
§1.4 Conclusion
However, one crucial question remains unanswered: what is the role of fila-
mentation in a tailored gain broad area laser? Do filaments exist at all, and if
so, why don’t they degrade device performance? Unfortunately, the resolution of
these exceedingly interesting questions are beyond the scope of this thesis.
Finally, Figure 1.13 presents an overall flow chart for the work of this thesis
and for some possible future extensions.
§1.5 Conventions Used Throughout This Thesis; References
(1)
Here we summarize conventions used throughout this thesis.
The real part of a complex quantity q will be denoted by either ¢g or Re{q};
the imaginary part will be denoted by either g, by Sm{q}, or by a different
symbol. Since the symbol z is used to denote the lateral dimension along a
waveguide or laser, we will refer to the real axis of the complex z—plane as the
€ axis.
A plane wave moving in the +z direction is denoted by et (Bz—wt) | where @ is
the propagation constant and w is the free space radian frequency of the wave.
N.B.: some authors, [40] for example, use et(82z—-wt) to represent the same
wave. See §2.6 for a brief discussion of this difference.
When we make a waveguide model of a gain guided laser, we assume a loss
in the unpumped GaAs active region of 200cm~! (85-13) The peak gain within
the waveguide is set by the requirement that at threshold the power modal
gain y exactly equal the mirror losses, which we assume to be 40cm~! for a
device 250m long.>! Unless we are attempting to model an actual device, we
will ignore the effect of the antiguiding parameter b. This parameter relates
the decrease in the real part of the refractive index due to the presence of
— 29 —
§1.4 Conclusion
Chapter 2 Single Element Lasers
Chapter 3 Two Coupled Lasers
4 Uniform Arrays
Real Index Guided
Chapter 4 Chirped Array
400mW Tailored Gain
L 33 Chirped Array
7 ;
Halftone Process
2D Gain Tailoring
200mW Tailored Gain
i ~———__
Chapter 5 23 Broad Area Lasers
Device Analysis of
L Performance Tailored Gain Waveguide
v v
W . .
Future Work Filamentation Beam Steering Tailored Index & Gain
Broad Area Lasers
Arrays of
Broad Area Lasers
FIGURE 1.13 Flowchart for work described in this thesis.
~30-
§1.5 Conventions Used Throughout This Thesis; References
gain. When it is included, we use a value 6 = = 3.0.52 The e*4? convention
IE
Sys
described above implies that 6 > 0.
(4) Unless otherwise noted, the figures plot intensity nearfield and farfield patterns.
The phase plots for gain guided modes are in radian units. In order to simplify
the labeling of the axes, 3.419 1 2°" is used to represent 3.410, 3.411, 3.412, etc.
Throughout this work, a familiarity with the fundamentals of laser theory, and
of that of semiconductor lasers in particular, is assumed. An excellent elementary
treatment of both topics may be found in the book by Yariv,?? while more ad-
vanced treatments may be found in the comprehensive works by Yariv,°! Casey
and Panish,*9 Kressel and Butler,®? and Thompson.*4 An elementary knowledge
of waveguiding in dielectric media is also assumed. Tamir®? provides a good in-
troduction to waveguiding in real index media as well as to the field of integrated
optics. Marcuse®4:55
gives an advanced treatment of (mostly) real index guided
waveguides, with particular applications to optical fibers. A good introductory ar-
ticle on semiconductor lasers is that by Panish,°® and a reasonably complete review
of recent advances in phased arrays has been published by Botez and Ackley.
Finally, while each chapter in this thesis leads naturally into the next, the
extensive cross-referencing should make it possible to read each chapter independ-
ently of the others.
~31-—-
CHAPTER
TWO
Single-Element Stripe Geometry Lasers
‘Excellent!’ I cried. ‘Elementary,’ said he
—Sherlock Holmes, The Adventure of the Crooked Man
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
§2.1 Introduction
Before considering arrays of semiconductor lasers, in §2.2 we review several
classes of single-element stripe geometry lasers which are potentially suitable for
use in phased arrays. These include strongly index guided structures such as
the buried heterostructure (§2.2(a)) and buried crescent lasers (§2.2(b)), buried
ridge (§2.2(c)) and air ridge (mesa stripe) lasers (§2.2(d)), and two types of gain
guided lasers, proton implanted and Schottky isolated (§2.2(e)). We find that
technological limitations make fabrication of strongly index guided lasers such
as the buried heterostructure unsuitable for use in evanescently coupled phased
arrays, so we next consider weakly index guided ridge structures. These latter
structures are really neither entirely gain nor index guided; we briefly examine
the interplay between gain and real index guiding in §2.3. Finally, we summarize
this information by discussing some design considerations for evanescently coupled
phased arrays in §2.4.
In §2.5 and §2.6 we summarize the properties of the simplest possible optical
model for a single-element laser, that of the symmetric three layer “box” waveguide
which forms the basic building block for all of our subsequent work. Finally, in
~32-
§2.1 Introduction
§2.7 we describe a powerful numerical method for finding the modes of a one-
dimensional waveguide with a nearly arbitrary index and gain profile; we will
make extensive use of a computer program based on this technique to check the
validity of the analytical results of Chapter 3 and also to analyze the complicated
array waveguides of Chapter 4.
§2.2 Semiconductor Lasers for Use in Phased Arrays
While almost all semiconductor lasers utilize a double heterostructure to
achieve carrier and optical confinement in the vertical direction(81-2) the variety
of methods of achieving carrier and optical confinement in the horizontal (lateral)
dimension is almost unlimited. We consider three broad classes of semiconduc-
tor lasers which are potentially suitable for use in phased arrays: material index
guided, effective index guided, and gain guided. The primary difference between
these types of lasers is the strength of the index of refraction difference between
the core and cladding regions which form the waveguide.
The index of refraction 7 of GaAs is 3.59, while that of Ga,_,Al,As is ap-
proximately given by! 7 = 3.590 — 0.710z + 0.91z”. Due to the possibility of
nonradiative recombination in Ga,_,AlzAs with z > 0.45,?the mole fraction of
aluminum is usually limited to z < 0.4. Thus, maximum feasible index step for
the GaAs/GaAlAs system is about An ~ 0.25.
Throughout this thesis, we will make waveguide models of both single-element
and multiple-element arrays of semiconductor lasers. In order to reduce the discus-
sion to the fundamental physical principles that apply to phased array lasers, we
will make use of the simplest possible model for a single-element waveguide, that
of the symmetric three layer slab waveguide shown schematically in Figure 1.4b.
— 33 -
§2.2 Semiconductor Lasers for Use in Phased Arrays
For obvious reasons, we will refer to this simple structure as a “box” waveguide;
extension of our work to more accurate waveguide models is straightforward. 34
(a) Buried Heterostructure Lasers
Material index guided lasers provide the largest index difference, and hence
the tightest confinement of the optical field. They make use of the differing ma-
terial properties of a GaAs/Ga,_,Al,As heterojunction with the mole fraction of
Al x = 0.2 to 0.4 in a manner entirely analogous to the double heterostructure
configuration in the vertical direction. A typical laser of this type is the buried
heterostructure”® illustrated in Figure 2.1.
fo diffused GaAlAs
p GaAlAs n GaAlAs
n GaAlAs GaAs active region
=— p GaAlAs
n* GaAs
FIGURE 2.1 Buried heterostructure laser.
The distinguishing feature of a buried heterostructure laser is that the GaAs
active layer is surrounded on all sides by GaAlAs. Figure 2.2a shows the lateral
waveguide model for a buried heterostructure laser 1.5m wide with z = 0.3, while
Figure 2.2b presents the intensity nearfield and farfield patterns of this waveguide
for the fundamental mode.
— 34 —-
§2.2(a) Buried Heterostructure Lasers
3.415 rT
3.385)
NE ARFIELD FARFIELD
1 L q qT | U q
7)
ii
i l 1 L 1 i AL L
-2 -| O | 2 -40 -20 0 20 40
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE @
(um) (degrees )
FIGURE 2.2 (a) Lateral waveguide model for a buried heterostructure laser with a cladding Al
mole fraction z = 0.3 and a width of 1.5m. (b) Nearfield and farfield for the fundamental mode.
Note the very wide farfield pattern.
Notice that as a result of the large index of refraction difference between GaAs
and GaAlAs the field is very well-confined. This, in conjunction with the large
energy band gap difference between GaAs and GaAlAs, provides excellent carrier
and optical confinement in both the horizontal and vertical directions, thus leading
to threshold currents as low as 15mA.’ However, if the laser is to have a single
lobed farfield pattern the widths of a buried heterostructure laser are limited to
about 1lum.® This limits the typical power output of buried heterostructure lasers
to a few milliwatts.
Strongly real index guided lasers such as the buried heterostructure have the
very desirable property that their spectral width is very much smaller than that
of a gain guided structure. This is of crucial importance in optical fiber appli-
cations, and especially so for heterodyne detection methods.? Therefore, it would
— 35 -
§2.2(a) Buried Heterostructure Lasers
be highly advantageous to be able to fabricate phased locked arrays of strongly
index guided lasers. Unfortunately, due to the techniques necessary to fabricate a
buried heterostructure laser, it is not currently possible to place two such lasers
closer than 2um— 3m apart. Figure 2.2b shows that as a result of the large index
step that tightly confines the field the overlap between the fields of adjacent lasers
will be very small, and thus an array of buried heterostructure lasers is not likely
to operate in a phased locked mode.!%!! It is possible to slightly decrease the re-
fractive index step by using smaller mole fractions z of aluminum in the cladding
layer. However, decreasing the mole fraction below z = 0.2, causes the threshold
current to rise dramatically because the carriers are no longer well-confined.!” We
therefore conclude that despite their great advantages of a low threshold current
and very pure spectral output, buried heterostructure lasers are unsuitable for use
in evanescently coupled phased arrays.
(b) Buried Crescent (Channeled Substrate) Lasers
Providing slightly less of an index step difference is the buried crescent (chan-
neled substrate or V groove) laser of Figure 2.3.!% This device takes advantage
of the differential growth rate of GaAs and GaAlAs inside and outside an etched
groove to create an active region that is thicker towards the center of the groove
than towards the edge, thus providing the good carrier confinement characteristic
of a double heterostructure.
It is possible to achieve some degree of control of the active layer thickness
between the elements, and thus control both the size of the lateral index variation
as well as the coupling between the lasers. Although the index step in these lasers
approaches that available in a buried heterostructure laser, the smooth variation
in the effective index profile provides improved mode discrimination between the
~ 36 -
§2.2(b) Buried Crescent (Channeled Substrate) Lasers
p* GaAs
pAlGaAs
nGaAs
AlGaAs
n GaAs
A cHaNWeL
FIGURE 2.3 Buried Crescent (Channeled Substrate) Laser.
fundamental and higher order modes in a single-element waveguide. These lasers
are attractive candidates for uniform phased arrays but not for nonuniform arrays
because it is not easy to obtain controllable growth using grooves of different
sizes.!4 We will therefore not consider such arrays in this work. We note, however,
that arrays of identical buried crescent lasers with variable spacing between the
array elements have shown promising results.}5
(c) Burted Ridge (Strip-Loaded) Lasers
Another method of confining the optical field in the horizontal direction makes
use of the “effective index” effect in a ridge guided structure.!® The refractive
index differences associated with effective index guided structures may vary widely
depending upon the particular details. Two such possible structures are shown
schematically in Figures 2.4 and 2.5. In each case, the optical mode tends to
concentrate in the high index region of the waveguide, which is indicated by the
dotted ovals in the figures. The first structure is referred to as a buried ridge or
sometimes as a strip-loaded waveguide, while the second is referred to as an air
ridge or mesa Stripe laser.
~37-
§2.2(c) Buried Ridge (Strip-Loaded) Lasers
Buried ridge structures are difficult to fabricate in the GaAs/GaAlAs sys-
tem because it is virtually impossible to obtain good regrowths over air exposed
Ga,_,Al,As with a mole fraction z of aluminum greater than 0.1.17 This fact, in
conjunction with the difficulty of controlling etching depths to a precision of better
than about 0.2m, limits the smallest obtainable index step to about An ~ 0.03.
Cr/Au SiQo
= NW p’-GaAs cap
Gdg7Alg 3As | {Caos Alo.iAs
active
region
Gdg7Alg As waveguide
FIGURE 2.4 Buried ridge laser.
The largest index step is limited to An = 0.1 by the requirement that the laser’s
farfield pattern be single lobed in the vertical direction as well. Nevertheless, de-
spite the difficulties with the regrowth process, buried ridge structures also provide
excellent candidates for phased array lasers, and in fact. have been used with some
success.18
We note that many laser waveguides, while technically not single lobed, do
lase with a single lobed farfield pattern. For example, a buried heterostructure
waveguide will support only a single mode if its width is less than about 0.5um,
yet many actual devices about lum wide show clean, single lobed farfield patterns,
suggesting that a better practical condition be that the vy = 3 mode be cut off.
The improved performance probably results from the fact that the vy = 2 mode
has a null at the high gain region in the center of the waveguide. (This is one
— 38 —
§2.2(c) Buried Ridge (Strip-Loaded) Lasers
instance in which our simplification of the actual waveguide to a box structure
is inappropriate.) This new criterion effectively doubles the useful width of the
waveguide, and places an upper limit of about 2um-— 3m on the width of a buried
ridge waveguide.
However, while this is a good design rule for an tsolated laser, it is not clear
that it holds for the elements in an array of lasers. For a given index step, as
the width of the laser increases the fields become more tightly confined, but it is
always true that the higher order modes with multilobed farfield patterns are less
well-confined than the single lobed fundamental. If the individual laser waveguides
support more than one mode, the coupling between the higher order modes in the
array will be greater than it will be for the fundamental mode, thus exacerbating
the tendency of the array to operate in an undesirable multilobed farfield pattern.
Therefore, it is probably advantageous to use single mode waveguides whenever
possible. This more stringent criterion would limit the width of the buried ridge
waveguide to about lum, with wider waveguides being marginally satisfactory.
(d) Air Ridge (Mesa Stripe) Lasers
An air ridge waveguide!%20
such as that of Figure 2.5 may be used to obtain
arbitrarily small index steps. These devices are sometimes referred to as mesa
stripe lasers because they are fabricated by etching a mesa into a four layer het-
erostructure which is similar to the three layer heterostructure described in §1.2
except for the addition of top ptGaAs cap layer. The metal to GaAs interface
forms a good ohmic contact, thus providing better injection into the laser than
does the metal to GaAlAs interface.
—39-
§2.2(d) Air Ridge (Mesa Stripe) Lasers
Schottky Barrier p'-GaAs cap
(blocking) Cr/Au p-contract
GaAlAs
SS rtng
region
GaAlAs 9
wavequide
FIGURE 2.5 Air Ridge (Mesa Stripe) Laser.
The maximum index step obtainable is limited by the precision with which
the etching action can be halted very close to the active region, typically about
~ 0.2um (although our experience indicates that it is very difficult to obtain uni-
form results when working to these tolerances; a better practical limit is probably
0.3um — 0.4um). This places an upper limit on the the refractive index step of
about An ~ 0.02; the lower limit is, of course, zero, and corresponds to no etching
at all.
(e) Proton Implanted and Schottky Isolated Gain Guided Lasers
A gain guided laser is usually considered to be a laser waveguide in which
there is no intentionally introduced real index guiding. Waveguiding is provided
solely by the gain distribution.24:22 There are a variety of types of gain guided
structures; we will make extensive use of both proton implanted”? and Schottky
isolated lasers*4 in Chapters 4 & 5.
Figure 2.6 presents a schematic diagram of such a gain guided proton im-
planted laser. The crystal damage caused by the implanted protons° creates high
— 40 —
§2.2(e) Proton Implanted and Schottky Isolated Gain Guided Lasers
resistivity regions in the upper cladding layer, thereby blocking injection every-
where except at the laser stripe that has been protected from the protons by a
thick (~ 34m) photoresist stripe.
H*- implant Cr/Au p-contact
( blocking)
a p* GaAs cap layer
ihhgkehihf Ltt. ae — ORLTUUT OUTED
LILLE \ KL
GaAlAs PEL Scniecte current
= + active
GaAlAs region
FIGURE 2.6 Proton implanted laser.
Typical implantion dosages are 5 x 10!6em-3. The implanation depth, and hence
depth of the insulating region, depends upon the proton energy. Proton implanted
lasers have been extensively studied, and offer several advantages over other types
of lasers from the point of view of phased array semiconducor laser design (see
§4.3). However, due to the thick photoresist pattern, it is difficult to achieve
feature sizes much smaller than 34m —5ym, and especially so for deeply implanted
devices.
A schematic diagram of another useful type of gain guided laser, a Schottky
isolated laser, is illustrated in Figure 2.7. It consists of a standard three layer
heterostructure with the 0.2um p*GaAs cap layer. After growth, photoresist
stripes are deposited on the surface of the wafer, and the thin pt GaAs cap layer
is etched away from the unprotected areas using a a noncritical wet chemical etch.
This type of laser is actually an “air ridge” laser with a zero etching depth. The
~ 41 —-
§2.2(e) Proton Implanted and Schottky Isolated Gain Guided Lasers
shallow etching depth does not affect the real refractive index profile, but does
control current injection into laser.
p*—GaAs cap (qoad injection)
Schottky Barrier C/A tact
(blocking) J. r/Au p-contac
GaAlAs AL inet current
GaAlAs
= active
region
FIGURE 2.7 Schottky isolated laser.
After removing the photoresist, a metal is deposited over the entire surface of
the device. The metal to p*GaAs interface (shown in black) forms an injecting
ohmic contact, while the metal to p Ga,_, Al, As interface (shown in white) forms
a Schottky blocking contact. Thus current is injected only into the region under
the ptGaAs stripe. The very thin cap layer allows the feature size to approach
the technological limit of about 2um.
It is important to note that in both structures, at any given point on the surface
of the wafer, current is either injected into the crystal or it isn’t; there is no simple
method for achieving partial injection and hence arbitrarily controlled variations
in the spatial gain profile. However, we will return to this point in §5.2 when we
demonstrate the halftone process for achieving nearly arbitrary two-dimenstonal
spatial gain profiles within a broad area semiconductor laser.
In an actual gain guided laser, the free carriers in the active region, and the
change in the electronic band edge due to the gain they introduce, leads to a
_ 42 ~
§2.2(e) Proton Implanted and Schottky Isolated Gain Guided Lasers
decrease in the real part of the refractive index within the core region; this is
known as the antiguiding effect.(81-2(¢4)) The ratio b = |An/An| is referred to
as the antiguiding parameter. Figure 2.8a shows the waveguide model for a gain
guided laser 64m wide. The gain in the core region is fixed by the requirement
that at threshold the modal gain of the fundamental mode be equal to the mirror
losses. (81-5)
+13.41500
tL
+13.41393
NEARFIELD FARFIELD
en ee T T 7
(B)
FE
LiJ
= —
oe ee | 1 !
-6 -3 0 3 6 -20 -I0 Oo 10 20
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE @
(ym) (degrees)
FIGURE 2.8 (a) Waveguide model showing the effect of antiguiding parameter b. (b) Nearfield
and farfield patterns for 6 = 0 (solid curve) and 6 = 3 (dashed curve).
Figure 2.8b shows the nearfield and farfield patterns for this mode with no
antiguiding (b = 0, solid line) and with an antiguiding parameter b = 3 (dashed
line) .“ Note that the nearfield patterns are very similar. Throughout this thesis
—~ 43 -
§2.2(e) Proton Implanted and Schottky Isolated Gain Guided Lasers
our waveguide models will therefore ignore the antiguiding parameter unless we
are attempting to model an actual device, (84-5(6),85-13)
Finally, we remark that most gain guided structures show single filament
operation (8!-2(2)) only if they are narrower than about 10um — 15um.*6
§2.3 Interplay Between Real Index and Gain Guiding
If the etching depth in an air ridge structure is too small, the effect of the real
index guiding becomes weaker than the effect of the gain guiding, and the laser
loses the advantages of a real index guided structure (low thresholds and spectral
purity). There is no clear dividing line separating a weakly real index guided laser
from a gain guided one. We therefore adopt the criterion that, to be considered
index guided, the size of the intentionally introduced refractive index step must be
approximately equal to the change in the :maginary part of the complex refractive
index in an otherwise equivalent purely gain guided laser.
The waveguide model for such a comparison is shown in Figure 2.9a. We write
the complex index of refraction step(82-5) as An = An+1 An with An = —AT/2kp
and AIT = Ig —TI¢. We assume a loss due to the unpumped GaAs active region
—T, ~ 200cm™!, and require that the peak gain Io inside the core region of the
waveguide be just large enough to give the fundamental mode a modal gain just
sufficient to balance the mirror losses of 40cm~1(§1.5)
A waveguide 6um wide a peak gain 9 ~ 50cm7! has a gain step AT = 250cm™!.
The peak gain Ip, and hence |n|, increases slightly as the guide becomes narrower
because the field extends farther into the lossy region. 250cm7!
corresponds to
a change in the magnitude of the imaginary part of the index of refraction of
An = AT/2kg = 0.0018. Figure 2.9b shows the superimposed intensity nearfield
and farfield patterns for the two equivalent (Am = |An| = 0.0018) waveguides
-— 44 —-
§2.3 Interplay Between Real Index and Gain Guiding
dashed curve solid curve
3.41500F +100 gain guided
. =|
(A) of saizest—l L|-a90 f Tem ) __ _ index quided
NEARFIELD FARFIELD
f rn re | ! i |! li i
>| 7] 4
rE
(ep) nn ~ ood
(B) Zz j |
Lil = | = —
a a -
— PF 7 <4 ]
je ee ee 1 a ee
-6 -3 0 3 6 -10 -6 -2 2 6 10
LATERAL DIMENSION _ FARFIELD ANGLE @
(zm) (degrees)
FIGURE 2.9 Waveguide model for gain guided (solid line) and equivalent real index guided (dashed
line) structure with An = An = 0.0018.
6um wide. The gain guided fields are indicated by the solid curves while the
index guided fields are indicated by the dashed curves. The gain guided nearfield
pattern is very slightly wider than the index guided nearfield, but because of the
§2.6(5)) the farfield patterns are virtually
phase front curvature due to gain guiding, |
identical. This indicates that using the criterion Aw = |An| as a dividing line to
distinguish a real index guided laser from a gain guided one is not an unreasonable
one.
In the preceding analysis, we have neglected the effect of the antiguiding factor
b which accounts for the depression in the index of refraction due to the free
carrier and band edge effects. (§1-2(4)) The antiguiding effect reduces the size of
the effective index step by about three times |f|.4 Therefore, we propose that
for an actual device to be considered as real index guided, it is necessary that
~ 45 -—
§2.3 Interplay Between Real Index and Gain Guiding
An > An +3|n| = 0.003 in order to offset the antiguiding effect. In an air ridge
waveguide, this corresponds to an upper cladding thickness of about 0.4um —
which is near the technoloical limit with which etching can be controlled. We
therefore conclude that almost all air ridge waveguides will be more or less gain
guided structures. We will refer to them as quasi-real index guided lasers.
Finally, we the presence of a metal film so close to the active layer will in-
troduce additional loss into the interchannel regions of an air ridge phased array,
thus promoting the tendency of the array to operate with a twin lobed farfield
pattern (§4-1) .
§2.4 Design Considerations for Evanescently Coupled Arrays
Figure 2.10 presents a graphical summary of the information presented in the
previous sections. We have plotted the waveguide width @ vs. the size of the
intentionally introduced real index step An. Lasers with widths narrower than
those indicated by the light dashed line support only the single fundamental mode,
while those wider than the heavy dashed line support more than two modes and
are hence probably unsuitable for use in phased array lasers. Lasers with widths
between the two lines support two modes and are therefore marginally suitable.
The vertical light dotted line indicates the approximate location of the regime
where An = An t.e., the dividing line between gain guided and real index guided
lasers if the antiguiding factor were to be ignored. The vertical heavy dotted line
accounts for the antiguiding factor of about three by indicating the approximate
location of the regime where An > An +3|n|. We consider lasers to the left of
the light dotted curve to be gain guided, those between the light and heavy dotted
curves to be quasi-real index guided, and those to the right of the heavy dotted
line to be real index guided.
~ 46 —
§2.4 Design Considerations for Evanescently Coupled Arrays
ao — Real Index Guided
| i274
_~ 11 Multiple : Ar
= lament: = ° Anw An:
4 aA eko
S =
An = An + 3) A
Co)
AS]
Oo
° AiR RIDGE
E= Ya
= i=—Y ‘ / BURIED RIDGE
| 4M mode /
2 : BURIED
| Technological ~ “Tae ble node /“HETEROSTRUCTURE
[4 Limit (stripe width) — Sex
single mode \
e) 0.0032 005 0.0! ae 05 .
Real Index Step An ——>
FIGURE 2.10 Design considerations for evanescently coupled phased array lasers. Ideally, an array
element should be real index guided and single mode. Current technological limitations make this
difficult, so we emphasize gain guided arrays in this work.
Finally, the upper limit on the width of a gain guided laser of about 10um
and the technological limit corresponding to the smallest practical feature size of
about 2um are indicated by the horizontal heavy solid lines.
This figure shows that the only candidates for truly real index guided arrays
are the buried heterostructure and buried ridge lasers, both of which will probably
support at least two modes. As discussed in §2.2(a), such waveguides are probably
unsuitable for use in evanescently coupled arrays requiring single lobed farfield
patterns. Almost all air ridge lasers are only weakly real index guided at best.
Given the current technological limit of about 24m feature size and the difficulty
of fabricating buried ridge waveguides, we conclude that the laser most suitable
~AT-—
§2.4 Design Considerations for Evanescently Coupled Arrays
for use in arrays will likely be either gain guided or at best partially gain and
partially index guided air ridge structures, and that even these will not be single
mode waveguides. For this reason, as well as others discussed in §4.2(a), most of
the experimental work of this thesis will be with gain guided lasers (also see §4.3).
We remark that these results indicate that many of the so-called “real index
guided” air ridge lasers described in the literature*”:?® are not truly real index
guided lasers as the term is commonly used. In particular, the on-axis farfield
pattern in Reference [28] is probably due to the symmetry of the waveguide, not
necessarily to the fact that they are real index guided. The effect of the gain guiding
is masked by the symmetry of the structure (see §4.2(a), especially Figure 4.5b,
and §5.12).
§2.5 The Helmholtz Equation
Having discussed some of the index of refraction profiles appropriate to semi-
conductor lasers suitable for use in phased arrays, we now summarize some of the
relevant properties of the optical modes of these waveguides.
The optical field E(r,t) inside any waveguide satisfies Maxwell’s wave
equation”?
2 2
n“(r) O°E _
3 5F =9 (2.5.1)
V7E —
where c is the speed of light in a vacuum, and n(r) is the index of refraction in
the medium. n(r) is, in general, a complex number*®
n(r) = nr) + 17(r)
(2.5.2)
= “n(r) — 10 (r)/2ko
and t = —1. The ordinary (real) index of refraction is denoted by n(r), while
['(r) = —2ko7(r) is the spatially dependent power gain experienced by an optical
-— 48 —
§2.5 The Helmholtz Equation
wave propagating through the point r. In the unpumped GaAs absorbing regions
of the waveguide, I(r) is a negative number.
In a semiconductor laser, E(r,t) is a complicated superposition of many
transverse, lateral, and longitudinal modes oscillating at several different fre-
quencies. We simplify the problem by considering only one oscillation frequency
(thus eliminating the longitudinal modes), and make the usual effective index
approximation!® (thereby eliminating the transverse modes). Furthermore, we
consider only TE waves*! traveling in the +z direction. After making these ap-
proximations, the electric field of a lateral mode may be written as
E(r,t) ~ XE(z)e(F2-%) = B = kon (2.5.3)
where E(x) is now a scalar electric field in the x direction, kg = 27/A is the
free-space wavevector, 2 = cko is the circular frequency of the wave.
Substituting (2.5.3) into (2.5.1) yields the scalar Helmholtz equation:*?
d2
zak t+ k2(n*(c) —n*)E=0. (2.5.4)
Solutions of this equation are referred to as modes of the waveguide. The effective
index of the mode is given by the constant 7; the propagation constant G in the z
direction is then given by 6 = kof. A very important quantity is the power modal
gain y = —2ko7 = — 28. The intensity of an optical wave which is an eigenmode
of Equation (2.5.4) will grow with z as e?”. In a laser, the lateral mode with the
highest modal gain will be the lasing mode at threshold.
Throughout this work, we will solve this equation for various refractive index
profiles n(x). In a real index guided waveguide, there is no gain or loss present, and
so the refractive index profile, the eigenmodes, and the electric fields are all real
quantities. In particular, we note that the phase ¢ of the electric field EF = |E| eb
— 49 -
§2.5 The Helmholtz Equation
is restricted to either 0 or 7. On the other hand, in a gain guided structure,
variations in the tmaginary part of the index of refraction determine the modal
properties more than do variations in the real part of the refractive index profile.
In this case, the eigenvalues are complex, the real part being the effective index
and the imaginary part being the modal gain as described by Equation (2.5.2). In
a gain guided waveguide, the phase ¢ of the electric field is no longer restricted to
either 0 or 7 and may take on any value.
We remark that the terms “real index guided” and “gain guided” refer to two
limiting cases in which variations in one part of the complex index of refraction
dominate the other. As we have seen in §2.3, an important class of lasers suitable
for use in phased arrays, the air ridge structures, may be considered to be either
gain or index guided. Such waveguides will play an important role at one point in
our work, and will be further discussed in §4.2(a).
§2.6 Symmetric Three Layer “Box” Waveguides
The simplest possible single-element waveguide is the symmetric three layer
slab “box” waveguide illustrated in Figure 2.11 and Figure 2.12, which has a
refractive index profile described by
Ne (cladding region) -co<24< —§
n(z) = ¢ no (core region) —§ <2< +§ (2.6.1)
Ne (cladding region) f <£2r<0
The quantities no and ne are, in general, complex. For waveguiding to occur, it
is necessary that in a real index guided laser ng > ne, while in a gain guided
laser [9 > Te, where [9 is related to the imaginary part of the complex index
of refraction through Equation (2.5.2). The properties of the real index guided
version of this waveguide have been extensively discussed in the literature,??—5
-50-
§2.6 Symmetric Three Layer “Box” Waveguides
while the gain guided version has been somewhat less well studied.2? In this work
we will introduce only selected aspects of the theory of these waveguides necessary
to aid our understanding of phased array semiconductor lasers.
In general, a waveguide will support many optical modes E”(z) where v is the
mode number. For the box waveguide of width @ illustrated in Figure 2.11, E”(z)
is given by
Beg(z+¢/2) -wo
E(z) = {se kx antisymmetric modes) vy = 2,4,6,... 2 St< 43
Be~9(2-4/2) f <2<0
(2.6.2)
where the normalization constants A and B are given by
E 2P
2 _ ke
n U/2+g-h B= Acos 2 (2.6.3)
with Zo = \/uo/€o the impedance of free space and P the power flowing in the
mode; this gives the conventional electromagnetic normalization®®
a ; W1L0 Zo
/ E;(z)E(j(z) dz = ae i i 2 koh (2.6.4)
— oo
with 6;; the Kronecker delta function. The lateral wavevector k inside the core
region and the evanescent wavevector g in the cladding region are given by
27
k= S(n6 — Pi?
Qn 5 ay 1/2 (2.6.5)
g= cw ~ ne)
where A is the free space optical wavelength. The eigenvalue 7 is determined by
the roots of the secular equation
_ } —k/g symmetric modes v = 1,3,5,...
tan(ke/2) = { —g/k antisymmetric modes) v = 2,4,6, eee (2.6.6)
~51-
§2.6 Symmetric Three Layer “Box” Waveguides
Equation (2.6.2) to (2.6.6) are valid for both real index guided and gain
guided box waveguides. The nearfield pattern is given by the magnitude of Equa-
tion (2.6.2), while the farfield pattern is given by a slightly modified Fourier Trans-
form of the amplitude nearfield pattern.37»38
Note that Equation (2.7-7) of Reference (37] uses the e~*9? convention, leading
to the (+7) transform of (2.7-28). Our use of the e+*#? convention in (2.5.3) implies
the use of a (—1) transform to obtain the farfield pattern. Furthermore, through
Equation (2.5.2), it also implies that the antiguiding factor 6 is greater than zero.
(a) Real Index Box Waveguides
For guided modes in a real index waveguide, ne < n < no. When 7 < n,-
the mode is cut off and is no longer guided. Figure 2.1la presents a typical real
index box waveguide. Figure 2.11b shows the intensity nearfield and corresponding
farfield patterns for the first five low order modes, while Figure 2.11c consists of a
plot of the effective index 7 for each of the eight guided modes. Notice that all the
higher order modes have nulls in their nearfield patterns, and that the intensity
of each maximum is the same. It is of particular interest to note that only the
fundamental mode has a single lobed farfield pattern; the farfield patterns of all
higher order modes are multilobed and symmetrical about 0° (85.12)
(b) Gain Guided Bor Waveguides
Figure 2.12 presents the corresponding plots for a gain guided box waveguide.
Since the refractive index is now a complex quantity, so also is the modal eigenvalue
n. As discussed in §2.5, the real part of the eigenvalue, denoted by 7 or Re{n}, is
the effective index for the mode, while the imaginary part, denoted by 7 or $m{n},
defines the power modal gain - = —2ko%. We therefore present the eigenmodes of
—-52-
§2.6 Symmetric Three Layer “Box” Waveguides
3.415
3,415 ‘Ora
+2
n¢
T T
Al. v
+ Ol
3.400
+h
NEARFIELD FARFIELD 3.410
aT}
+O +o
3.415
nN
=|(==|S|[-
3,400
LLL EL
ELLIE
U8 //)
SS
SS
=|=|=|-
‘a L 1 1 L i 1
“10-5 O 5 10 -30 -20 -iI0 0 i0 20 30
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE
(jem) (degrees }
FIGURE 2.11 Modes of the real index box waveguide (a) refractive index profile (b) nearfield and
farfield intensity patterns for the first five modes (c) mode structure. Note the nulls in the nearfield
patterns and the multilobed farfield patterns for all except the fundamental mode.
—53-
§2.6(b) Gain Guided Box Waveguides
(A) (C)
| und ~l i T i] i T i
40 cm ' BOL v=i@ _|
r = 2
Le —| ~200 em! = 3+
E +4
QO
(B) NEARFIELD FARFIELD — 5
~ 40 4
z +
oO
vel 2 :
s 30 4
w +
oO
a.
| 20h 4
vee 1 i i ! i i
3.414° 2 4 6 8
—Re {a}—
SEE
SN
Mc
im
Ih
a ee L_ oe
~-40 -20 0 20 40 -6-4 -2 0 2 4 6
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE
(pm) (degrees)
FIGURE 2.12 Modes of the gain guided box waveguide (no antiguiding) (a) gain profile (b)
nearfield and farfield intensity patterns for the first five modes (c) mode structure. Note the
slight differences from the modes of the real index box waveguide of Figure 2.11.
—~54-
§2.6(b) Gain Guided Box Waveguides
a waveguide with gain in a modal diagram which plots y vs. 7. The modal diagram
for the waveguide of Figure 2.12a is presented in Figure 2.12b. The modal gain of
a mode is approximately related to the overlap between the optical field and the
gain distribution within the waveguide. This implies that since the lower order
modes are more well-confined, they have higher modal gains than do the higher
order modes.
Another effect of the gain is to make the wavevectors k and g complex, and
to introduce curvature into the phase fronts of a mode, reflecting the fact that
power flows from the high gain region of a mode (inside the core region) towards a
low gain region (in the cladding region).°9 The phase front curvature (and hence
astigmatism) will therefore be less for the fundamental mode in a very wide wave-
guide than it will be in a narrow waveguide in which the fundamental has a modal
gain much less than the peak modal gain. Unfortunately, because of the poor
mode discrimination, the higher order modes of a wide laser will also lase; this
is one cause of the poorly characterized farfield patterns of conventional uniform
gain semiconductor lasers ($1-2(a-22)) (The effect of the complex wavevectors will
be further discussed in §3.5(c); also see §5.10).
Figure 2.12b presents the corresponding intensity nearfield and farfield pat-
terns for the first five modes of a gain guided box waveguide. Comparison of
nearfield patterns of the real index box waveguide of Figure 2.11 with that of the
gain guided box waveguide of Figure 2.12 shows that unlike the real index guided
case, the gain guided structure has deep minima in the nearfield patterns. The
only exact null occurs only at the center of the waveguide. Furthermore, the in-
tensity peaks in the nearfield pattern are no longer uniform but increase slightly
towards the edge of the waveguide.
—55-
These differences between real index and gain guided box waveguides may
be easily understood by introducing a new, very powerful method for analyzing
waveguide modes. In brief, the method consists of following the path of the ar-
gument of the optical eigenfunction (e.g., kx in the sine or cosine functions of
Equation (2.6.2)) throughout the complex plane; hence the name “Path Analy-
sis.” We will use this method to analyze the uniform box waveguide in this chapter;
however, the real power of Path Analysis will not become apparent until we begin
our study of the asymmetric linear tailored gain waveguide in Chapter 5, where
we will see that it allows analytical calculation of waveguide properties using some
simple geometric and algebraic arguments.
In general, a waveguide eigenmode must be described in terms of a linear com-
bination of the two linearly independent solutions of the second order differential
Helmholtz equation (2.5.4) inside the waveguide. In the case of the uniform box
waveguide, these are the sine and cosine functions. The boundary conditions then
determine the relative contribution of each of the two linearly independent solu-
tions to the optical field on each side of the interface. However, it is often possible
to simplify the analysis by eliminating one of the independent solutions by suitable
choice of the coordinate system. For example, if the origin is taken to be at the
center of the box waveguide, symmetry implies that each eigenmode has a definite
parity, either even or odd, corresponding to the cosine or sine functions, respec-
tively. Thus, the symmetry of the waveguide allows the eigenmode to be described
entirely in terms of the properties of either the cosine function (symmetric modes)
or sine function (antisymmetric modes).
Figure 2.13 illustrates the use of Path Analysis for the simple case of a real
dE (x
index box waveguide. The boundary conditions require (1) that E(x) and a
~ 56 —
§2.6(c) Path Analysis of Box Waveguides
be continuous at the edges +¢/2 of the waveguide, and (2) that the electric field
outside the waveguide be an evanescent exponential.
REAL INDEX GUIDED: k real
—AMPLITUDE—>
l N | L |
-2T1 -17 O 1 er
—€ = kx——
FIGURE 2.13 Path analysis for a wide real index guided box waveguide showing the path of the
argument kz of the sine or cosine function along the real axis for the first three modes.
For a well-confined mode, the argument kr must be approximately equal to a
zero of the cosine or sine function when |z| = ‘. This is shown by the endpoints
of the heavy solid horizontal line in Figure 2.13. This line plots the line £ that
the argument € = kz of the sine or cosine function follows along the real axis
for the first three modes in a wide real index waveguide with many well-confined
modes. For the fundamental mode, the line starts near € = —ké/2 ~ —1/2 and
—~57-
§2.6(c) Path Analysis of Box Waveguides
ends near € = +ké/2 = +/2. Equation (2.6.5) shows that the length of the line
£ increases with the mode number v. In a real index waveguide, k is real so that
L is restricted to the real axis.
Figure 2.13 also plots the sine and cosine functions using a solid line for the
first three modes, thus yielding the vy = 1,2,3, modes of Figure 2.11. Since the
sine and cosine function vary between 0 and +1 along the real axis, the minima
of the electric field will all be exact nulls, while the intensity maxima will be the
same for each peak across the guide, as shown in Figure 2.11b.
GAIN GUIDED: K COMPLEX
[_J< |sin(z)| <
oO
> a4
iT]
Poles
0 + 2x 30 4r Sm
—Re{z}—e
FIGURE 2.14 Path analysis for a wide gain guided box waveguide showing the path of the argument
ka of the sine or cosine function in the complex plane for the y = 11 mode. The values of the
complex sine function are indicated using level lines.
Now consider the case of a gatn guided box waveguide of Figure 2.12. The
eigenvalue 7 and wavevector k are now complex, and the path of the argument
£: z= kz of the sine or cosine function is no longer restricted to the real € axis. It
~ 58 -
§2.6(c) Path Analysis of Box Waveguides
now makes an angle @ = tan~! smi with the real axis, and will cross it only once
at the exact center of the waveguide when x = 0. We therefore need to consider
sin z or cosz as a function of the complex argument z = (k + ik) x. Figure 2.14
shows a plot of the level lines of |sin z| near the real axis along with the path £
for the vy = 11 mode of a very wide waveguide. Since the only zeros of the sine
and cosine functions occur along the real axis, we see that there will only be one
exact null in a gain guided box waveguide at z = 0. The exponential growth of the
sine and cosine functions away from the real axis suggests that the intensity of the
optical field will also grow exponentially away from the center of the waveguide.
Physically, this is due the incomplete reflection of the wave at the edge of the
waveguide, which in turn leads to net power flow away from the waveguide core
into the surrounding lossy media. This causes the phase fronts of the mode in the
core region to be curved (see §2.6(b) and 3.5(c.ii)). Mathematically, we can write
the electric field intensity inside the waveguide as
= |cos(k + ik)x ? (2.6.7)
= cos* kr + sinh? kz .
The nearfield pattern of a high order mode have an envelope function which grows
exponentially away from the center of the waveguide. These results are plotted in
Figure 2.15, which compares the high order y = 11 mode of a real index and gain
guided box waveguide, clearly illustrating the effect of the complex k vector and
its effect on the nearfield pattern.
—~ 59 —
§2.6(c) Path Analysis of Box Waveguides
Real Index Guided Gain Guided
(A) (B)
_ L__
y=l\ y =i
FIGURE 2.15 Comparison of the vy = 11 mode for (a) real index and (b) gain guided box waveguide
showing the effect of the complex k vector on the nearfield pattern.
Although the preceding discussion was directed towards waveguides which sup-
port many high order modes, we remark that the complex k vector also has an
effect on the width of the fundamental mode when compared with an equivalent
real index guided mode (see Figure 2.9). The evanescent wavevector g of Equa-
tion (2.6.5) is also complex. This has a very important effect on the modes of
coupled gain guided box waveguides (see §3.5(c.ii)), and may lead to enhanced
coupling between the elements in an array of gain guided lasers($3-5(¢.24))
§2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides
The Helmholtz equation (2.5.4) describing optical wave propagation in a di-
electric media may be solved exactly over all space only for a few continuous index
profiles n(x) such as the quadratic and inverse cosh distributions.** As we saw
in §2.6, the effect of step discontinuities, such as those encountered by the stan-
dard double heterostructure, may be included by solving the Helmholtz equation
within piecewise continuous regions of space and then requiring that the electric
field and its derivative be continuous at the interface. This technique works well
—~60-
§2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides
for the simple case of a double heterostructure because the eigenfunctions of the
free space Helmholtz equations are the sine and cosine functions, which are easy
to evaluate numerically.
—— exact
‘ eecv5e approx.
INDEX n(x)
LATERAL DIMENSION x
FIGURE 2.16 Numerical approximation for complicated waveguides showing an arbitrary index
profile (solid line) and its slab waveguide approximation (dashed line).
As illustrated in Figure 2.16 the same technique may be used to obtain the
approximate eigenvalues of waveguides with more complicated index profiles by
subdividing a wide waveguide with a continuously varying index of refraction into
many smaller contiguous slab waveguides, each having a constant index of refrac-
tion. The electric field inside each elemental slab waveguide may then be written
in terms of the sine and cosine functions (or, alternatively, as complex exponen-
tials). Matching the boundary conditions at each interface and requiring that
the field decay evanescently outside the waveguide yields an eigenvalue equation
which may be solved numerically. The net effect of this approach is to transform
the Helmholtz equation from a second order differential equation into an algebraic
equation whose roots give approximations for the eigenvalues.
-61-
§2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides
We use a matrix propagation technique which has found application in quan-
tum mechanics?® and in the study of periodically stratified optical media*! and
extend its use to waveguides with arbitrary index and gain profiles. We write the
electric field at any point z inside the r** elemental slab waveguide as a superpo-
sition of traveling waves moving to the left and right:
E,(z) = (apetibr# + bre thr) etlkonz—Mt) 1,2,...7; (2.7.1)
ay and by are constant coefficients, which are, in general, complex. 1 is the angular
frequency of the optical wave, and ky is the spatial lateral wavevector in the r¢?
kp = koy/n2 — 2 (2.7.2)
where ko is the free space wavevector 2m ny is the (possibly complex) index of
slab which is defined by
refraction in the r‘” layer, and 7 is the effective index of the eigenmode. In
what follows, the z and t dependence is superfluous, and so we drop the second
exponential product in (2.7.1).
If we write the electric field in Equation (2.7.1) in vector form
; ik,
E,(z) = jeri ,e *] é| (2.7.3)
and match the boundary conditions at the interface between the r*? and rt? +1
layer. We can derive a relationship between the a and 6 coefficients on each side
of the interface in terms of a matrix equation
Or+1| = 7, | or 2.7.4
ict] =a [fe r
where the tnterface propagation matriz J is given by
= _1i krtt + ky ky44 —ky
an 2ky+t fae —kyp Kkpya thy | ° (2.7.5)
-~62—-
§2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides
Similarly, after free space propagation a distance / through the layer, the elec-
tric field becomes
E,(x + 1) _ a,ettkr(z+l) + beter (z+)
_ al.etthrz 4 ble thr ;
The new coefficients a}. and b/. are given by the matrix equation
a a
where the free space propagation matriz F, is given by
tkyl
Given arbitrary az and by coefficients at the far left of a guide with n layers,
the corresponding ap and bp coefficients at the right of the guide may be found
by multiplication of the ¥ and I matrices:
ap | _ A B ay
|= [2 5 | (3 | (2.7.9)
where
M= E b | =InFnIn—tFn—1- heli (2.7.10)
and the layers are numbered from left to right.
For a real index waveguide, the fields must be evanescent in the cladding region,
so that ky and kp are imaginary. If we write
kr =t9LR (2.7.11)
the exponential functions then have real arguments gy, p:
tikaz —gz
jee | —_ | . (2.7.12)
~ 63 —
§2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides
For a guided mode, the coefficients ay and bp to the exponentially growing terms
must be zero. This leads to the dispersion relationship
D=0. (2.7.13)
This result may also be derived by invoking the radiation condition that allows
only outward traveling waves to contribute to the field of a guided mode. Gain
guided waveguides are similar, but the condition (2.7.11) becomes Sm{kz} < 0.
The dispersion relation (2.7.13) remains unchanged, but the k, are complex.
As an example, consider the symmetric three layer slab waveguide
ny = Ne -—wo<2r<07 where ne and ng are (possibly complex) constants. The evanescent wave vectors (ig + k)2e—tke _ (—ig +4 k)ettke 0 = Dthree layer — (2.7.15) where k and g are given by Equation (2.6.5). Equation (2.7.15) reduces to _ J -k/g positive root — symmetric modes) (2.7.16) This method may be extended to slab waveguides with more layers, although the zeros to be found numerically. For real index waveguides, 7 is real, and the —~ 64 — §2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides zeros of D are easy to find. If, however, the effects of gain and/or loss are to be In waveguides in which gain is not a perturbation (e.g., in a gain guided laser), For example, inspection of the contour plot of Figure 2.17 shows that there is Once the eigenvalues have been found, the electric field may be calculated by setting (5%) to (°), multiplying by J, to get the a and 6 coefficients inside the first ~ 65 — §2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides ate — EFFECTIVE INDEX Re {n}——> Im {y}/2k,—> MODAL GAIN y FIGURE 2.17 Contour plot of the level lines of the magnitude of the dispersion function of a computer programs used to calculate the dispersion function D, and to calculate ~ 66 — §2.7 Numerical Solutions for Arbitrary Waveguides the nearfield and farfield patterns of a mode are given in the Appendix. We have made extensive use of these programs throughout this thesis. ~67- CHAPTER THREE Better two than one by himself, —Ecclestiastes 4:9 In this Chapter, we consider in detail the very simplest possible array, that We consider weakly coupled real index guided waveguides in §3.1, strongly experimentally in §3.5. — 68 — §Two Coupled Lasers The solution of the Helmholtz equation with an index profile consisting of two phased array semiconductor lasers. (a) _ 2 | An, Ne (b) —~ P24, Ano (c) FIGURE 8.1 Spatial variation of the refractive index for two uncoupled waveguides (a) ny(zx) and Following Yariv,!? we consider the case of the two planar waveguides illus- Figure 3.1c, is given by n(x) = n3(z) + n3 (2) —n? (3.1.1) — 69 ~ §3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides where ne is the common cladding index external to all the core regions. We We denote the eigenmodes of guide 1,2 as Ey, (zx) e*1,27 with both fields as- The eigenmodes of the combined guide are denoted by E(z,z). In the limit fields in the two elemental waveguides: where c. c. represents the complex conjugate. In the absence of coupling — that E(z,z) = [Ey(x) + @ Eo(zx)] e?? . (3.1.3) We desire to find the new mode propagation constant @ and the admixture factor If we define a column vector E(z) to represent the two terms in (3.1.2) ee = eee | = (EG) a ~70- §3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides then the evolution of E(z) is described by the matrix equation dE — =1CE 1.5 = 1.6 The coupling coefficients K12 are given by? 21 — . [Ho ; matrix (3.1.6). The eigenvalues of (3.1.6) are given by the roots of the secular equation Bi-B kip Kot Bs B| = 9: (3.1.8) Since the two basis vectors Ey 2(z) are assumed to be orthogonal, the diagonaliza- which are known as the “supermodes”‘ of the composite waveguide. They may be written as E*(z) = oe eBee (3.1.9) where is the propagation constant of the (+) supermode and « = ,/K12K 1 is the mean rameter A are defined to be B = 3(B1 + Ba) (81 — Be) . -~71- §3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides Finally, the admixture factor o* is given in terms of the normalized phase mismatch parameter 6 ot =6+V14+ 62 = +exp(+sinh~! 6) Nn (3.1.12) The special condition 6 = 0 (which corresponds to 3; = (2) is referred to as the The phase matching wavelength is a very important number which character- the modes of the isolated waveguides: As the two waveguides become more closely phase matched, the supermode in each guide. The solutions E+(z) become This is, of course, to be expected in the special case of two identical waveguides two modes (corresponding to 8+) is usually referred to as the (++) supermode, ~72— §3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides while the out-of-phase combination (corresponding to @~) is referred to as the the phase matching wavelength. f \ ZX FIGURE 3.2 Schematic diagram of supermodes near the phase matching wavelength. These results are shown schematically along with the dispersion curves for the to the dispersion curves for the uncoupled individual waveguide modes. Near the ~73- §3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides phase matching wavelength at which the two individual waveguide modes cross, coupling constant. (a) Calculation of the Phase Matching Wavelength From the point of view of optoelectronic device design utilizing two nonidenti- We start with the dispersion equation (2.6.6) for the fundamental mode of a guide. Equation (2.6.6) is of the form D(z2) = D(ne,no, A, 2,7) = ke/2tan ke/2 — g£/2 =0 (3.1.15) 20 x (3.1.16) and the xo represent the five parameters n,,no,,0, which define a mode in parameters. If we expand the dispersion equation (3.1.15) for the second waveguide —~74- about the unperturbed parameter values of the first guide using a first order Taylor expansion, we can write oD ,6(2;) = 0 (3.1.17) Ly=Tz; D(z? + 52;) ~ D(x®) + )~ where z; represent the parameters corresponding to the first guide and 6(z,) rep- establishes a linear relationship between the partials of D and changes in at most four of the five parameters: For example, if we allow changes only in the width @ of the guide and the core index no, 6(£) and 6(ng) are related by B ab 6(é) = ~ 34 (no) = jak 6(no) (3.1.19) and k and g are given by Equation (3.1.16). We remark that essentially the same parameters in Equation (3.1.18). —~75— §3.1(a) Calculation of the Phase Matching Wavelength We now consider a numerical example to help explore the limitations of the there is only one phase matching wavelength; this point will be discused further in §3.3. (b) Comparison of the Coupled Mode Theory With the Exact Theory We use the two waveguides of Figure 3.3 to illustrate the predictions of the matching point the admixture factor is unity, as expected. 3.595 3.590 3.585 t 3.580 Index — Effective 3.575 3.570 3.565 3.560 3.555 3.550 —~76- §3.1(b) Comparison of the Coupled Mode Theory With the Exact Theory GUIDE | An £(ym) - §) {0.051 0.943274347 dp =.846975446 pum | ! J l } | a FIGURE 8.3 Dispersion curves for two slightly different real index guided box waveguides. The ~77 —- §3.1(b) Comparison of the Coupled Mode Theory With the Exact Theory WAVE GUIDE © ®) An=0.050_ An=0.05! -10 fF | “20 fn +3.58846179 -120 -80 -40 0 40 120 FIGURE 3.4 Exact solutions near the phase matching wavelength for the two waveguides of Fig- However, Figure 3.5 shows that far away from the phase matching wavelength in especially in §3.2(b). —~ 78 - §3.1(b) Comparison of the Coupled Mode Theory With the Exact Theory WAVEGUIDE eo © (R) kK 3.580-F 3.5755 3.570F \ 3.565 3.560fF 3.555- ] ] ! l r 1 | FIGURE 8.5 The solid lines plot the exact solutions far away from the phase matching wavelength ~79- §3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides Three assumptions have been made in the derivation of the coupled mode equations: (1) that the composite eigenmode can be expressed as a linear combination of the (2) an adiabatic approximation® which makes the coupled mode equations (Equa- (3) that the individual eigenmodes E}2(z) in (3.1.2) are orthogonal. These assumptions restrict application of the coupled mode theory to weakly Assumption (1), that the composite eigenmode can be expressed as a linear We will now construct a more precise theory of the coupling between two known as LCAO theory (for “Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals”)!° that is ~ 80 - 83.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides used to calculate the wavefunctions and eigenenergies of simple molecules such as If we rewrite the Helmholtz equation (2.5.4) as 1 @ 2 2 Although the equations are mathematically similar, there are some differences formulation. -81- The optical problem of finding the effective indices and electric field for a single We therefore rewrite the Helmholtz equation (3.2.1) as an eigenvalue equation: with ¥ being the “optical Hamiltonian”: da x + ken? (zx) (3.2.5) field E(x) (which is denoted in the Dirac notation by |E >) as a linear combination of the electric fields £y(x) and E2(x) (or |1 > and |2 >, respectively): where c 2 are constants (note that the coupled mode theory admixture factor 0 =c/c 1). The single guide field |1 > satisfies the Helmholtz equation d2 ~82- 83.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides and similarly for ¥2|2 >. For |E > to be an eigenvector of ¥ it is necessary and sufficient that that is: 2 2 j=l This system of equations has a nontrivial solution only if Hi ~ B°S11 Fiz ~ 6° S12 _ where S;; =< 1|j >, Xj; =< 1|H|j >, and Similarly, Mio = B2Sy2 + Rig Ho, = 0?So1 + Rai (3.2.8) (3.2.9) (3.2.10) (3.2.11) (3.2.12) where 81,2 = kon1,2 are the mode propagation constants, the terms C, and C2 represent a small correction to the propagation constants p? and 63, respectively, due to the presence of the other guide. R12 is the coupling coefficient between the 21 first and second (second and first) guide; its relation to the coupled mode coupling parameter « will be discussed below. In general, Rj need not equal Ro. Cy 2 and Riz correspond to the Coulomb and resonance coupling integral in the quantum 21 ~ 83 - §3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides mechanical formulation. For the optical problem considered here, the integrals S, C, and R are given by C1 = ke [ . 3 (x) 72] Bi (x) dz (3.2.13) Ri =k [- CG (x) - nt| Ey (2) E2(z) dx 21 —~oo Since the fields |1 > and |2 > are assumed to be normalized, we have S11 = waveguides S12 = Soi = S, and the eigenvalue condition (3.2.10) becomes Bi-BP+Cy (63 —B*)S + Riz} _ 0. (3.2.14) Aside from the explicit inclusion of the overlap and Coulomb integrals, we The coupled modes solution is expressed in terms of the first power of @ while the the more exact LCAO approach gives the eigenvalue as 6”. This difference actually — 84 — §3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides has no significant effect on the numerical values of the propagation constants for The term (? occurs in the Helmholtz equation because Maxwell’s wave equa- necessary that® d’Ay,2(2) dA1,2(2) and similarly for A} (z) and for the (+—) supermode. The inequality which ex- presses the validity of the adiabatic approximation (3.2.15) becomes It is easy to show that this condition is always satisfied for GaAs/GaAlAs wave- side of Equation (3.2.17). Using Equations (2.6.4), (3.1.7), and (3.1.11), we arrive at k k For a GaAs/GaAlAs/GaAs waveguide, the inequality (3.2.17) reduces to An/ne < 0.6. The worst case An, corresponding to a GaAs/Gag¢Alo.4As ~ 85 —- §3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides heterojunction, gives An/ne = 0.3/3.5 < 0.6, and so the adiabatic approximation The coupled mode theory secular equation Equation (3.1.8) may be derived Of far greater importance than the adiabatic approximation is the appearance Equation (3.2.14). Unlike the coupled mode theory, the Coulomb term cannot be — 86 ~ §3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides absorbed into the propagation constant in the LCAO formulation of the problem. number of independent parameters (e.g., 81, 82, C1, C2, Ry2, Ro1, and S). (a) Two Identical Waveguides However, considerable insight may be obtained by considering several special becomes where 8 = 8, = B2, C = Cy = Co, and R = Ry2 = Rp. Equation (3.2.19) has the (3.2.19) solution R LC 1- Ss? that the splitting increases as the overlap between the fields increases. - 87 - §3.2(a) Two Identical Waveguides Kd FIGURE 8.6 Cut-off of the highest order supermode. The strong coupling drives the effective The effect of the overlap integral on the eigenvalues has an interesting effect At first glance, it appears that there is a paradox in the disappearance of this second mode because, as indicated on page 70, the effect of the perturbation — 88 — §3.2(a) Two Identical Waveguides produced by the second waveguide upon the first is to introduce nondiagonal Equation (3.2.20) shows that (8+)? > 62+(R+C)/2 as the distance between We close this section by noting that this latter result could have been antic- Figure 3.7c). ~ 89 - §3.2(b) Two Nonidentical Waveguides We next examine the case of two nonidentical coupled waveguides, taking into The eigenvalue secular equation (3.2.14) becomes Bf - B? (83 - B) s+ RI _ =0. (3.2.22) (G2 -B)S+R ps - | where 3 = 4(p? + 63) and the effective phase mismatch parameter A! is given by A’ =(1—S7)A where A is the coupled mode theory parameter of Equation (3.1.11). Note that in mode theory and LCAO theory parameters, it is necessary to divide the LCAO ~ 90 - §8.2(b) Two Nonidentical Waveguides parameters by (1,2). We therefore anticipate that the admixture factor g will tend 1 A2 (3.2.25) The admixture factor a is obtained from Equation (3.2.22) as (3.2.26) If we writeo =1—Sand6=A /R as the normalized phase mismatch parameter, oF 8 (3.2.27) G= — oO a= As S + 1s0 that o ~ 0, @ + 1 no matter what the value of 6. In other words, no We have therefore fully explained the long wavelength result of Figure 3.5. —~91- §3.2(c) Breakdown of the LCAO Theory To summarize: we have shown that the adiabatic approximation (Assump- Figure 3.7 presents a graphical comparison of the exact electric fields (dashed increases. Finally, when the waveguides just touch each other, we see that the ~ 92 - §3.2(c) Breakdown of the LCAO Theory 0.5 jem + ke d= lum LATERAL DIMENSION FIGURE 3.7 Comparison of the amplitude superposition (solid curve) and exact (dashed curve) superposition field is less clearly well-confined than the exact result. This occurs, upon the product VAné, which is greater for the two touching waveguides than it is for the separate individual waveguides.!? — 93 - §3.3 Coupled Waveguides Without a Phase Matching Wavelength In the previous sections we have seen the paramount importance of the phase Ridge guided (mesa stripe) lasers are fabricated by etching away selected re- N,|s >= a + Kine) |s >= B2|s > (3.3.1) where we have used the Dirac notation of §3.2, ns(z) represents the refractive index no for this waveguide is the same as that of the first waveguide, but is of —~94- §3.3 Coupled Waveguides Without a Phase Matching Wavelength WAVEGUIDE ANo~Nef— ] (B) y DISPERSION CURVE Agi FIGURE 3.8 Dispersion curves for various coupled waveguides (a) Schematic diagram of an air — 95 - greater extent in the lateral direction by an amount 6(£). We consider differences between the two guides 6n(z) to be a perturbation on the first guide: where 6n(zx), which is also shown in Figure 3.8a, is non-zero only over the region terms of the first using first order perturbation theory:4:7 where An = no — ne and the power filling factor I’ is defined by Top= / |E,(z)|? de . (3.3.4) ko Although the numerical values of the power filling factor Tye +6 (2) and the prop- Similarly, it can easily be shown that waveguides with 6(n) 4 0, and 6(@) =0 also do not have a phase matching wavelength. This result may also be shown — 96 - §3.3 Coupled Waveguides Without a Phase Matching Wavelength using the Taylor expanson of (3.1.17) because if only one of the 6(z;) # 0 then We therefore conclude that the only types of waveguides which will have phase The fact that two nonidentical ridge waveguides do not have a phase matching gain broad area laser in Chapter 5. — 97 - §3.4 The Effect of Gain on Weakly Coupled Waveguides We now consider the case where gain and/or loss are present.!° To simplify the When gain is present, the quantities Ai 2; B+, «, and 6 are complex numbers. At the phase matching wavelength (8; = By = B) the complex propagation constant (Equation (3.1.10)) is given by B* =B+13(B, + Bo) + Ky/1— (6)? . (3.4.1) The eigenvectors E(z) are (compare with (3.1.12)) | exp(<8sin-? 6) Joy} <1 E*(z) = (3.4.2) E exp(#i cosh"! in) | ldq| > 1 The amplitude admixture factor @ is now a complex number which we write distribution: both supermodes have equal intensity in each waveguide. — 98 - §8.4 The Effect of Gain on Weakly Coupled Waveguides (A) (B) 100 T T T T T FIGURE 8.9 Effect of gain on the admixture factor for two phase matched waveguides (a) phase The relative phase shift ¢+ between the electric fields in each guide varies con- When there is no gain mismatch (6y = 0), d+ = 0 for the inphase (++) The term sin~! y becomes imaginary when there is a large gain mismatch at the guides is always 7/2, but the intensity distributions of the supermodes are now different from each other. As is illustrated in Figure 3.9b, one supermode has ~ 99 - for several values of the normalized gain mismatch parameter 64. 0.57 on oO. (++) mode B8<0 :|al—lel” INTENSITY ADMIXTURE |p|? (+-) mode : {p|— |p| | lL l L 1 tl l \ I ! NORMALIZED PHASE MISMATCH 8&8 FIGURE 8.10 Effect of gain on the admixture factor for two phase mismatched waveguides. ~- 100 - §3.4 The Effect of Gain on Weakly Coupled Waveguides The corresponding values for the (+—) supermode may be obtained by reflecting the curves about \o|? = land ¢= 7/2, respectively. It is interesting to note that Figure 3.11 plots the exact numerical results for the same waveguide as Fig- Finally, although Figure 3.10 shows that the modified coupled mode theory chirped array. §3.5 Strongly Coupled Gain Induced Waveguides We have seen in §3.1 that when we consider the case of two weakly coupled order supermode into cut-off so that only one supermode remained. The addition - 101 - §3.5 Strongly Coupled Gain Induced Waveguides WAVEGUIDE £2\00pm £=0.94+ SUL M Ih 3550k Oo \ > — d( pm) — FIGURE 3.11 Exact solutions of two coupled real index waveguides with large gain mismatch. ~- 102 - §3.5 Strongly Coupled Gain Induced Waveguides of gain (§3.5) did not change the situation appreciably; we still found two modes for weakly coupled waveguides. (A) (D) FIGURE 3.12 Eigenmodes of two strongly coupled gain guided box waveguides (a) gain profile When we numerically solve for the supermodes of two strongly coupled single mode, the two coupled waveguides support not just one or two but four modes! - 103 - §3.5 Strongly Coupled Gain Induced Waveguides Notice that the intensity nearfield pattern for the vy = 3 supermode has three have a bearing on this puzzle. (a) Two Coupled Multimode Real Index Guided Waveguides Finding four modes suggests that although we claimed that the single-element Since the modes of a symmetric waveguide must have a definite parity,!4 sym- waveguides that arise from the 2 @ 2 coupling. Notice that the intensity nearfield - 104 - §3.5(a) Two Coupled Multimode Real Index Guided Waveguides 199] INTENSITY PHASE INTENSITY PHASE FIGURE 3.13 Eigenmodes of two coupled double mode box waveguides (a) waveguides (b) These results are very similar to what we found for the gain guided case of Figure 3.12, and suggest that our “single mode” gain guided waveguide of Fig- ure 3.12a is not as “single mode” as we had thought. - 105 - §3.5(b) Leaky Modes of a Gain Induced Waveguide It is possible to find solutions of the secular eigenvalue equation (2.6.6) for Figure 3.14b presents the modal diagram for the single-element gain guided The pole at 7 = me and the branch cut to the right of this pole are due to mode. - 106 - §3.5(b) Leaky Modes of a Gain Induced Waveguide (B) (A) > na 0 -5 0° 6 5 iG 16 20 258 “iO -§ 6 5 10 i5 20 25 FIGURE 3.14 Leaky modes of the gain guided box waveguide (a) waveguide of Figure 3.12(b) Examination of the nearfield patterns for the “extra” »v = 3 and v = 4 modes not play a role in the coupling between real index waveguides, they may play a role in the case of strongly coupled gain induced waveguides. (c) Coupling Mechanism Between Gain Guided Lasers The complex nature of the index of refraction in a gain guided laser makes show that this effect is a direct result of the interference of the complex evanescent - 107 - §8.5(c) Coupling Mechanism Between Gain Guided Lasers waves associated with each gain guided laser, and briefly discuss the implications for coupling between gain guided lasers. Coupling Between Mechanism Gain Guided Lasers: Experiment We have used the separate contact laser developed by Katz, et. al.1® to ex- The spectrally resolved nearfields of pairs of coupled lasers, separated by var- Generally, the phase locked modes of the coupled lasers appeared at wave- secondary peaks in the intervening coupling region. An example of such a phase — 108 - §3.5(c.i) Coupling Between Mechanism Gain Guided Lasers: Experiment I I I | 2 3 LZZLZILLLLLLLLLL LL PEE (A) ( J active layer | f | I L Lateral Dimension (4m) FIGURE 8.15 Standing wave patterns between gain guided lasers (a) exprimental diagram (b) — INTENSITY (arb. units) —> ~ 109 — §3.5(c.i) Coupling Between Mechanism Gain Guided Lasers: Experiment locked mode is shown in Figure 3.15. Figure 3.15a illustrates the way in which As the current through the contact between the coupled lasers was increased, increases with increasing current J». The nearfield patterns presented above can be understood by recalling that To illustrate the phenomenon, first consider a single gain induced waveguide of width @. We take the origin to be located a distance s/2 to the right of the ~ 110 - §3.5(c.i) Coupling Between Mechanism Gain Guided Lasers: Experiment (a) T,=1,=50mA — K- 18pm 2° iOmA (b) I,= 40mA I, 35mA — bh [8 pLm I,=|5mA I,=20mA I,=30mA FIGURE 8.16 Variation of the standing wave pattern with coupling current. Note that as the -1li- §3.5(c.ii) Coupling Mechanism Between Gain Guided Lasers: Theory guide. The electric field amplitude external to the channel region (x > —s/2) may E,(z) =e (@+9/2)9 ~ ¢~*92 @—92 (3.5.1) where g is the complex evanescent lateral wave vector given by 9=G9419 = koy/n? —n2. (3.5.2) The effect of g 4 0 is to cause the phase fronts of the evanescent field to be tilted external to the waveguide I(r) = |E(x)|“, we see that the effect of the imaginary part of g is masked by complex conjugation: The interchannel nearfield pattern corresponding to a single laser is thus a simple Now consider two identical coupled gain induced waveguides separated by a electric field between the waveguides is therefore given by 1, _9s 4 ~ - 112 - §3.5(c.ii) Coupling Mechanism Between Gain Guided Lasers: Theory This function is plotted in Figure 3.15c with g = 0.3+1.4rium7!. Interference The fringe period depends on the angle @ = sin—!(§/kg) between the phase of the output beam. - 113 - CHAPTER FOUR I am afraid that I rather give myself away when I explain. ~—Sherlock Holmes, The Stock-Broker’s Clerk In this chapter, we extend the results of the previous chapter to systems of The actual implementation of these ideas into a working device came to re- vice. Along the way, we will discuss a variety of waveguides relevant to phased ~ 114 - § Phased Array Lasers array laser design so that the reader will, we hope, emerge with a good under- In particular, we will stress time and again the importance of a large inter- Finally, in §4.6, we summarize the many advantages of an array with a very broad area laser. §4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers The coupled mode analysis of Chapter 3 may be readily extended to the case 1 we presume that of more than two channels. Following Kapon, Katz, and Yariv, fundamental spatial mode. This elemental mode is described by its electric field ~ 115 - §4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers E,(x)e*?i?, where! = 1,2... N and {; is the propagation constant for the elemental combination of the elemental modes: where N = 2 for the two coupled waveguides of Figure 3.1 and the z dependence equations for the array may once again be written in the form dE, where E is a vector n whose elements are Ey = Aye? . We assume weak overlap The array supermodes are, by definition, the eigenvectors of Equation (4.1.2), t.e., those vectors that satisfy where 8” is the propagation constant of the supermode E”(z). Substitution of (4.1.3) into (4.1.2) gives the matrix eigenvalue problem where J is the identity matrix. -— 116 - §4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers A solution of Equation (4.1.4) yields the N supermodes that are supported by 5 > o Ei(z) +e. ¢.. (4.1.5) f=1 Generally, the eigenvalues of an arbitrary N-channel array must be found E’ (2) = by solving Equation (4.1.4) numerically. The special case of a uniform array of 6, = B and k;j = « and the solution of Equation (4.1.4) is)? = B + 2«cos (= 7 oy = sin (4 :) Figure 4.1 shows the nearfield patterns of the five supermodes which are sup- vy=1,2,...N. (4.1.6) ported by an index guided array of five identical channels. The lateral distribution channel. The (+ +++ +) supermode of the five-element uniform array (which -117- §4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers (A) v5 (ns os 1 LATERAL FARFIELD FIGURE 4.1 Supermodes of a five-element real index guided uniform array. The channel width - 118 -~ §4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers is referred to as the fundamental mode) corresponds to the (++) supermode of Almost all semiconductor laser structures are designed so that the gain is great- Finally, we note that the farfield pattern of the fundamental supermode is This is the case for all the array waveguides considered in this thesis. ~ 119 - §4.1 Uniform Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers We showed in Chapter 2 that two phase mismatched waveguides will support These ideas extend themselves in a natural way to a chirped array of lasers Figure 4.2 shows the supermodes supported by a real index guided chirped In principle, the lasing of higher order supermodes in a chirped array could be suppressed by tailoring the spatial gain profile across the array so as to favor the — 120 - §4.2 Chirped Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers (A) (B) 1 2 3 4 5 6 v=5 2) == | ee eee Se i | LATERAL FARFIELD FIGURE 4.2 Supermodes of a five-element real index guided chirped array. The channel widths ~121- §4.2 Chirped Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers fundamental supermode. Since the other supermodes are increasingly localized at and they will not lase until well above threshold. (a) Limitations of Real Index Guided Chirped Arrays Unfortunately, there are both fundamental and technological limitations that Reference to Figure 2.10 in our discussion of the types of lasers suitable for Furthermore, given a variation in the stripe width of 0.54m, the phase mis- for the same array as Figure 4.2 but with various values of the refractive index NEARFIELD INTENSITY (arb units) -20 FIGURE 4.8 Limitations of strongly coupled chirped arrays due to phase mismatching. (a) re- ~ 122 - §4.2(a) Limitations of Real Index Guided Chirped Arrays - | a a Se —_ 0.0010 Tr +4 0.0005 l ] L L 10) 10 20 30 40 50 LATERAL DIMENSION (yum) FARFIELD PATTERN INTENSITY (arb units) ! I tL i supermode for various index steps An; (c) corresponding farfield patterns. — 123 - §4.2(a) Limitations of Real Index Guided Chirped Arrays step An. (The effect of gain has been ignored for the moment). We see that the refractive index step across the array to about +0.0002. 50f- Or FIGURE 4.4 Plot of the refractive index step Af in an air ridge waveguide as a function of the This number implies some extraordinary constraints on the precision with into the upper cladding region must stop just under 0.5um from the active layer - 124- §4.2(a) Limitations of Real Index Guided Chirped Arrays (which is easily possible), but that the uniformity with which the etching must Furthermore, even if new technology made it possible to control the etching for the chirped array of Figure 4.4, but now the effect of gain has been included. (A) FIGURE 4.5 Limitions of chirped arrays due to the effect of gain. (a} Waveguide model and The gain profile is tailored to match the fundamental mode, thus assuring for this chirped array. Note that it is essentially single lobed, but slightly displaced - 125 - §4.2(a) Limitations of Real Index Guided Chirped Arrays from the facet normal. We will see in §5.12 that the off-axis farfield pattern is In conclusion, we have shown that fundamental and technological limitations We therefore turn our attention to arrays of gain guided lasers. §4.3 Uniform Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers We have seen in previous sections that reducing the size of the index step Although suffering from the disadvantage that their spectral properties are offer several important advantages over their real index counterparts. (1) Most importantly, from a research point of view, gain guided lasers are far (2) The spatial gain profile simultaneously determines both the eigenmodes as well as the modal gains, thus potentially simplifying device design. — 126 - §4.8 Uniform Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers (3) The interchannel gain in a proton implanted laser may be controlled by simply (4) A gain guided laser confines the optical field significantly less strongly than a (5) Finally, in a nonuniform structure the intrinsically weak nature of the gain of the device. We commence our study of arrays of gain induced waveguides by noting that In most of the waveguide models we discuss, the antiguiding factor has been Figure 4.6 presents (a) the gain profile, (b) the nearfield and farfield patterns, guided lasers shows that the nearfield and farfield patterns are essentially identical. — 127 - §4.3 Uniform Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers (A) (C) ih PHASE (RADIANS) -10 O 10 20 30 40 50 -EEE> (yum ) FIGURE 4.6 Supermodes of a gain guided uniform array of five lasers 5um wide on 9m centers: ~ 128 - §4.8 Uniform Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers Note that the phase plot diagram in Figure 4.6d shows that the phases of each Of somewhat more interest is the modal diagram of Figure 4.6c. Not surpris- coupled gain guided chirped arrays. (34-4(2)) (a) Box Modes and Array Modes Figure 4.7 illustrates another interesting point about waveguide models for ar- also shown. ~ 129 - §4.3(a) Box Modes and Array Modes WAVEGUIDE MODE PATTERN NEARFIELD GAIN S 3 re) Te) (um) FIGURE 4.7 Comparison of the mode patterns and nearfield and farfield patterns for (a) an array, When the effect of the unpumped active region external to the array is added The interesting point is to compare the modes of Figure 4.7b with the vy = 5 mode of the wide box waveguide with the same width in Figure 4.7c, where we see — 130 ~- §4.8(a) Box Modes and Array Modes that (except for a relatively minor change in the envelope functions), the vy = 5 We remark that examination of Figure 4.7 reveals that for the special case of nonuniform gain guided arrays. §4.4 Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers In a single-element laser the modal gain of the fundamental mode is approx- should also achieve some degree of gain tailoring in a gain guided chirped array. ~ 131 - §4.4 Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers In such an array, we can take advantage of the fact that in a gain guided laser array structure that favors the fundamental single lobed supermode. (a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical For example, Figure 4.8 plots the increase in the real part of the effective index 60cm! and a cladding loss of 200cm~!. y { i | q FIGURE 4.8 Variation of effective index and modal gain in a gain guided laser. The channel — 132 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical We see that as long as the widths of the laser channels are greater than about Figure 4.9 illustrates the waveguide model for such a chirped array of five- effective modal gain in each channel. f rf | | Bum be 4pm—>| he FIGURE 4.9 Schematic diagram of a five-element gain guided chirped array based on the plot of If we number the channels sequentially from the wider to the narrower, then finement factor of the channel mode is greater in a wider guide than in a narrower ~ 183 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical one, the fundamental supermode should also have the highest modal gain. We Unfortunately, when we compute the supermodes of this array, we discover More importantly, as a result of the 7 phase shift between adjacent channels, We also note that the vy = 2 “antisymmetric” mode is localized under the this anomalous behavior is unknown; however, it may be related to the fact that ~ 134 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical (A) (C) PHASE (RADIANS ) SEER -20r FIGURE 4.10 Supermodes of a weakly coupled gain guided linearly chirped array of five lasers - 135 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical this particular array is both gain guided and very strongly coupled; these results We also observe another interesting aspect of asymmetric gain-induced wave- Finally, note that both the vy = 1 and vy = 2 supermodes have appreciable the width of the laser). This should also cause the mode to spread out over more ~ 136 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical of the array, thus making more effective use of the gain distribution. Secondly, Figure 4.11a shows just such a waveguide. This waveguide is identical to that Figure 4.11b shows that one possible exception to this pattern is the vy = 5 However, it is clear from Figure 4.11b that the effect of the small nonuni- form array perturbation, while only slightly affecting the nearfield patterns, has ~ 137 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical (A) (C) FIGURE 4.11 Supermodes of a five-element strongly coupled gain guided chirped array (same — 138 - §4.4(a) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Theoretical introduced a radical change in all of the farfield patterns save that of the vy = 5 su- Given our quest to design an array with a single lobed farfield pattern, the exceedingly interesting one. — 139 - §4.4(b) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Experimental At this point in our work, a rather fortuitous accident occurred. We noted in Figure 4.12 presents a cross-sectional schematic diagram of two such nonuni- lym with 5um between channels. iA) LOW INTERCHANNEL GAIN (B) HIGH INTERCHANNEL GAIN FIGURE 4.12 Schematic diagram of a (a) weakly and (b) strongly coupled proton implanted -~ 140- §4.4(b) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Experimental For the second configuration’ (pattern B in Figure 4.12b), which is essentially To fabricate the array, four layers were grown by molecular beam epitaxy The interchannel gain in a chirped array of proton implanted lasers may be implantation pattern, it is therefore possible to vary the interchannel coupling — 141 - §4.4(b) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Experimental from its minimum value (deep implant, minimum interchannel gain) to a maximum We remark that our early work® used wafers grown by liquid phase epitaxy greater uniformity of the MBE process. (a) LOW INTERCHANNEL GAIN (b) HIGH INTERCHANNEL GAIN FIGURE 4.13 Experimental farfield patterns for (a) weakly and (b) strongly coupled proton The farfield patterns just above threshold for an array with small interchan- thickness), and an array with very much larger interchannel gain (Figure 4.12b, ~ 142 - §4.4(b) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Experimental pattern B, shallow implant of 80K eV, 1.1m spreading thickness) are shown in Figure 4.14 shows the experimental farfield patterns at various current levels We have therefore finally achieved our goal of creating a high power phased array with a single lobed farfield pattern. §4.5 Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays After achieving single lobed operation of a strongly coupled proton implanted We noted in §4.4(a) that the y = 5 mode has the highest modal gain and the and therefore excites the vy = 5 “box” mode. This higher order mode will always be — 143 ~ §4.5 Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays ~~ 75 mW 2.2° 450 mW 3.3° 1.8 Ibn 5.31 200 mW —* 2.5° ge INTENSITY (arb units) I.8° L \ | L ! | L L FARFIELD ANGLE @ (degrees) FIGURE 4.14 (a) Diffraction limited operation at 1.3J;, and (b) high power operation at 5.3/4, We are greatly indebted to Dr. Shlomo Margalit for pointing out that it was quite possible that the spatial gain profile across the array was not uniform as we — 144 - §4.5 Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays had first assumed. In the proton implanted chirped array of Figure 4.12, each of than it is under the narrower ones. (a) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Experimental The gain tailoring effect in a proton implanted chirped array is confirmed by The weak interchannel coupling due to the deep implant in Figure 4.15a is the spontaneous emission pattern. ~ 145 - §4.5(a) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Experimental {B} HIGH INTERCHANNEL GAIN (A) LOW INTERCHANNEL GAIN \f 7 7 T Y T T ’ y T T T T 7 T r —INTENSITY (arb units)» FIGURE 4.15 Spontaneous emission pattern showing gain tailoring in (a) weakly coupled (b) We have therefore discovered a very effective means of intentionally control- patterns will form the bulk of the remainder of this thesis. — 146 - §4.5(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical We now need to incorporate gain tailoring into our waveguide model. The We have discussed at length several advantages of a high interchannel gain, channel gain. The laser channel widths varied from 8m to 5um in steps of 0.5m. — 147 - §4.5(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical NEARFIELD FARFIELD aie (C) Ne 28 gain 100 1 Po ij ! J j I | 1 I FIGURE 4.16 Theoretical nearfield and farfield patterns for the predominant lasing mode in a broad area laser shown in (c). ~ 148 - §4.5(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical The interchannel thickness was 2.5um. These dimensions correspond to the device Up to this point, we have considered gain guided lasers in which there is no Figure 4.16 demonstrates how increasing the interchannel gain decreases the Figure 4.16c shows the limiting case of a tailored gain chirped array in which Figure 4.16c is an idealization which cannot be achieved by the methods of this — 149 - §4.5(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical chapter. We will fabricate and analyze such a true tailored gain broad area laser The theoretical nearfield and farfield patterns for the shallowly implanted Notice also that the fundamental vy = 1 mode has a nearfield pattern which is Notice that unlike the uniform gain box waveguide of Figure 4.7c in which the mode discrimination between the principal y = 3 and v = 4 modes is 9cm7!. - 150 - §4.5(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical LATERAL DIMENSION 50-7 —T rn Ss | L -40 0 40 860-5 O05 LATERAL FARFIELD FIGURE 4.17 Theoretical supermodes of the strongly coupled tailored gain chirped array of have single lobed farfield patterns. - 151 - §4.5(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical Near threshold (where the effects of gain saturation are less important) a strongly Figure 4.17d shows that the phase fronts of both modes are nearly linear and §5.11) Furthermore, the phase front curvature of the fundamental mode of angle.| Finally, Figure 4.17b shows that the farfield patterns of the modes of the waveguide, these modes emit power on both sides of 0 = 0, (85-12) thus leading in the emission angle. These predictions are confirmed by the experimental results of Figure 4.14. - 152 - §4.6 Tailored Gain Phased Array or Broad Area Laser? §4.6 Tailored Gain Phased Array or Broad Area Laser? Throughout this work, we have emphasized the importance of a high inter- channel gain in a phased array laser. In summary, the high interchannel gain (1) enhances the ability of the array to operate in a phase locked mode;? (2) reduces the phase and gain mismatch between nonidentical waveguides, thus decreases the tendency of the array to operate in a high order mode with a decreases the amount of power radiated into the sidelobes in a tailored gain reduces the phase front curvature, thus potentially reducing the astigmatism may increase the reliability of the array. If any laser element in a weakly neighbors as well. It is interesting to note that although the schematic diagrams of Figure 4.15b superficially resemble those of an array, examination of the gain profiles via the spontaneous emission patterns below threshold reveal that the effect of the array has been nearly, if not completely, obliterated by current spreading in the upper ~ 153 ~ §4.6 Tailored Gain Phased Array or Broad Area Laser? cladding layer. Therefore, it is actually better to refer to such a device as a tailored Finally, the work of Welch, Scifres, et al.19.1! should be mentioned. We uti- As shown in Figure 4.18c, they demonstrated that best results were obtained implanted version, and especially so since the presence of lossy unpumped regions ~ 154 - §4.6 Tailored Gain Phased Array or Broad Area Laser? (B) GaAs (p TYPE (A) PROTON IMPLANT STRIPE WIDTH IS LINEARLY CHIRPED MULTI-QUANTUM-——~+ WELL ACTIVE LAYER Ally 4G g As (n TYPE) Wa (C) Farfield Patterns 8y, degrees FIGURE 4.18 “Offset Stripe” geometry tailored gain chirped array. (a) top view showing offset can only increase the device threshold relative to that of our own version of the device. ~ 155 ~ 84.7 Summary of Chapter 4 §4.7 Summary of Chapter 4 To summarize: one way to achieve single lobed operation in a semiconductor tailored gain broad area laser). — 156 ~ CHAPTER FIVE Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers God created man simple; —Ecclestiastes 7:30 §5.1 Introduction As we have shown in Chapters 1 to 4, conventional broad area semiconductor One method for achieving high power semiconductor laser operation is to mode is localized in a different spatial region than the higher order modes. (842) If — 157 ~ §5.1 Introduction the gain profile within the laser is then tailored to match the intensity pattern of In an index guided laser, the electric field is determined by the spatial de- laser became blurred (84-6) The proton implanted chirped array structure provided Nevertheless, it is possible that some residual effect due to the chirped array halftone process works by varying the fractional coverage of injecting (metal to pt GaAs) contact relative to Schottky blocking (metal to pGaAlAs) contact over ~ 158 - §5.1 Introduction the surface of the laser. We will obtain single lobed diffraction limited beams from We will also show in §5.9 that the highly nonuniform gain profile made possible To analyze asymmetric ramp waveguides, we make use of the method of Path We find that the linear asymmetric tailored gain waveguide has several unusual guided lasers in which higher order modes have nulls in their nearfield patterns — 159 - §5.1 Introduction and multilobed farfield patterns, the higher order modes of linear asymmetric The beam emission angle at threshold is sensitive to the exact value of the an- Finally, in §5.14, we briefly discuss the effects of gain saturation on the farfield tical tailored gain broad area lasers. §5.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental In our discussion of proton implanted lasers in §2.2(e) we pointed out that could be achieved only if the interchannel gain was very large. We did this by — 160 — §5.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental means of a shallow proton implantation. Obviously, the leakage current model is A moment’s reflection will reveal that our goal of achieving intermediate values surface by using many very closely spaced dots of varying size. ORM ATTs No. 7278 sosticnecn Sn materete x FIGURE 5.1 Graded halftone screen obtained from an artist’s supply store. This pattern was used The eye’s limited spatial resolution causes the discrete nature of the dot to A quick glance at any newspaper or magazine photograph fully illustrates the -— 161 - §5.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental versatility of the halftone process for achieving complicated patterns with varying We did something very similar to this when we made the shallowly implanted Much smaller feature sizes, on the order of lum — 2um, may be obtained by A plan view of an asymmetric tailored gain broad area laser based on the sition and thickness of the layers are as follows: n Gao,7 Alo.3As lower cladding layer — 162 - 85.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental "HALFTONE" ptGaAs Halftone pattern ¥OO4 LS pm AuGe/Au GAIN Cleaved mirror—~, current fiow by \ tL... minimum B p'-GaAs O p~Gay7Al,As Output beam @eea = 288 8 tJ Cleaved mirror” FIGURE 5.2 (a) Plan view of a “halftone” asymmetric linear tailored gain broad area laser, (b) within the device. Output beam — 163 - §5.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental 1.5um thick, Si doped, 3x 10!7cm7!: active region composed of a four layer multi- The 0.2um p*GaAs cap layer was etched away using H2S04:H202:H2O 1:8:40 according to the pattern of Figure 5.1. As described in §2.2(e), the metal to pt GaAs interface forms an injecting ohmic contact, while the metal to Although the halftone laser of Figure 5.2a has only a one-dimensional variation of the array structure; such devices are truly broad area lasers, with the desired ~ 164 - §5.2 Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers: Experimental spatially nonuniform gain profiles controlled by the ptGaAs dot density on the Figure 5.2b shows a schematic waveguide model with a linear spatial gain The pulsed, low duty cycle nearfield and farfield patterns for the linear asym- The structure in the nearfield pattern at 3.2/,, in Figure 5.3a may be due to (§3.5(c.2),5.9) patterns) and the theoretical analysis of filamentation(§1-2(27)) in tai- lored gain broad area lasers are beyond the scope of this thesis. §5.3 Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide We begin our analysis of tailored gain broad area lasers by first considering the much simpler example of a real tinder guided ramp waveguide with a refractive — 165 - §5.8 Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide (A) (C) 2.3° —e 2COOMW (B) 7) ‘€ om Fo) a 18° Gj 2.21 J x12 21th = \ < \ 0.7 lin (degrees) FIGURE 5.3 (a) Nearfield patterns and (b) high power single lobed farfield patterns for the “halftone” laser of Figure 5.2. Note the nearly linear spatial gain profile as evidenced by the — 166 — §5.3 Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide (A) (Cc) .—q= Lo es ee ce LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE FIGURE 5.4 Modes of the asymmetric tailored real index ramp waveguide (a) refractive index — 167 - §5.8 Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide index profile described by term second order in z, the Helmholtz equation inside the guide becomes d2 which has the solution where a and 0 are real constants, Ai(é) and Bi(é) are the Airy functions, and ko 2 2 ing the boundary conditions at r= 0 and r= ¢; (85.6) VP _Bi(e) — Bi'(p) VP, Bile + we) + Bil(o + we) , : : ; =0 5.3.5 Figure 5.4b presents the intensity nearfield patterns for the first five modes of the real asymmetric linear tailored index waveguide all have nulls in their nearfield ~— 168 - §5.8 Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide patterns, but unlike the box waveguides the peak intensity within the waveguide argument € of the Airy function along the real axis. §5.4 Path Analysis of the Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide Before we make use of Path Analysis, it is necessary to determine which one the electric field inside the waveguide by E(x) ~ Ai(€) E=pt+wz where we have used the appropriate asymptotic approximation for the Airy function.4 - 169 - §5.4 Path Analysis of the Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide Phe) Bi(x): exponential growth | Ai(x): exponential decay j 4 j j j | ee ee | l j j ] i 1. -1,0 €=p+ wx —~ FIGURE 5.5 Plot of Ai(€) and Bi(é) along the real axis showing that Bi(é) does not satisfy the We saw in §2.6(c) that each of the modes of the box waveguide could be asso- In a manner entirely analogous to the case of the box waveguide, for a well- has one endpoint at at the zero of the Airy function p = —r,, and the other endpoint at p+wé. The length of this line is |wé| with w given by Equation (5.3.4). -170- §5.4 Path Analysis of the Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide The quantity w corresponds to the lateral wavevector k of the box waveguide in but does not change its length. FIGURE 5.6 The path of the argument to the Airy function along the real axis for the first three -171- §5.4 Path Analysis of the Linear Tailored Real Index Waveguide Figure 5.6 plots the intensity |Ai(£)| (dashed line), the path CL along the real Path Analysis may be used to derive an approximate expression for the cut- not true near cut-off. §5.5 The Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide If we allow the constants in Equation (5.3.1) to be complex numbers, the (5.5.1) The gradient of the complex index of refraction within the guide 0 < z < @ is given by oko. o is a dimensionless quantity which plays a key role in determining -— 172 - §5.5 The Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide the properties of the waveguide. It is a real number in a real index guided laser, defined by og = s(b—12) (s > 0) (5.5.2) where 6 is the antiguiding factor which relates the depression in the real part of the 2kpe It should be noted that in this model there will always be a step discontinuity The solution to the Helmholtz equation (5.3.2) is given by a linear combination of the two Airy functions E(z) = aAi(p + wz) + bBi(p + wz) (5.5.4) — 173 - §5.5 The Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide p= 5 (92 —n§) w = ko(2nga)3 complex z—plane with one endpoint at z = p and the other endpoint at z = p+w. The length of this line is |wé|, but the line £ now no longer lies on the real axis. —~13m{o} Notice that the orientation of £ in the complex plane does not depend on either The angle w that £ makes with the real axis is given by pp = /w ~ ftan the width of the waveguide or the gain gradient but only on the antiguiding factor. go=-ts (pure gain guiding, s real) (5.5.6) where s is related to the guide parameters by Equation (5.5.3). We can then write Gd as Each branch of the cube root gives rise to a physically meaningful mode, leading rotation in the complex plane; this will be discussed in §5.13. -~174- 85.6 Dispersion Equation and Eigenvalue Branch Structure Once again, for a well-confined mode, the path £ will start near a zero of Ai(z). the ratio a/b inside the guide: a) __ ve_Bile) ~ Bie) 56 VP,Bi(p + wé) (p + wé) (5.6.3) ble=e—/p,Ai(p + we) + Ail(p + wl) | with the box waveguides of Figures 2.11 and 2.12 and the real ramp waveguide — 175 ~ §5.6 Dispersion Equation and Eigenvalue Branch Structure 34145 6 7 8 98 (A) (Cc) =>|| = -EAF _— ( pm) (degrees ) oO FIGURE 5.7 High gain modes of an asymmetric tailored gain ramp waveguide (a) gain profile (b) — 176 - §5.6 Dispersion Equation and Eigenvalue Branch Structure of Figure 5.4, we present the equivalent tailored gain waveguide of Figure 5.7. To understand these differences, we examine in detail the Airy functions of complex argument. §5.7 The Airy Functions of Complex Argument In order to obtain simple analytical expressions for the eigenvalues, nearfield As we have shown in §5.4, along the negative real axis, Ai(€) resembles a Bi(€) into the complex z—plane. -177- §5.7 The Airy Functions of Complex Argument At this point we introduce the full first order asymptotic expansions to the Airy waveguides. The leading behavior of Ai(z) and Bi(z) as |z| — co is* Alle) ~ n—1/2(_2)-W4 sin(2(—z)2 +7] Ec le< 8 6.12) The magnitude and phase of both Airy functions are illustrated over the com- The various sectors described by Equations (5.7.1)and (5.7.2)are referred to as gain waveguides and will be discussed further in §5.8, and §5.10 to §5.12. - 178 - §5.7 The Airy Functions of Complex Argument (A) | Ai(z)| (B) [Bitz] [Ss Ne Se RE SOs OE ES GE SS SS Ve SE SN Ee Swe SO SE Oh ee aa ae ae ae My ae rl YO AAW 6) 0) TOT TNT TOT OT TT RS DOP AEP EP et re 10 ee ett 40-8 6 -4 2° 0° 2 4 6 8 10 “10 -8 6 -4 2 O 2 4 6 8B I oO (C) i [os SOOO SO SS SN Ss EG pop dt fa) A R al al ~ 0 ) FIGURE 5.8 Airy Functions of Complex Argument. Level lines for the magnitude of (a) Ai(z) ~ 179 - §5.8 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide In order to proceed with the theoretical analysis, it is necessary to deter- make use of the wider waveguide of Figure 5.9 for the remainder of this work. = Ah,= 3.415 FIGURE 5.9 Asymmetric tailored gain ramp waveguide used for illustrative purposes throughout Using the root of (—i)!/8 = e~**/6 which is appropriate for the this branch along with (5.6.1) to compute the ratio a/b in the sector |Zz| < % for the v** (+) This ratio is plotted in Figure 5.10 for a guide with a constant gain gradient of mode, we get Vv ~ 2exp je? + pu |we|*? (5.8.1) approximately lem! /wm and varying widths 2. The ratio a/b can approach a dominates that of Bi(z) for the first few modes of guides wider than about 50um. - 180 - §5.8 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide | ioe} E(x)=a Ai(z)+bBi(z) ojo v=e ee nd . Se am GUIDE WIDTH ( ) FIGURE 5.10 Ratio of |Ai(z)|/|Bi(z)| for the first three modes on the (+) branch for guides of However, this ratio, by itself, is conclusive only when the magnitudes of the two waveguide of Figure 5.9 are well-confined: the electric field is close to zero at the edges of the guide. - 181 - §5.8 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide en en ie en on a ee ee yyy \r . \ - \h\e L -6-4 \0\ \ \ \F [~ 7 a\z = Py \\ + | -8-4 OV \\\a\r I. RS aN \ LE -i0 1 a ae ha at 19 10 -8 -6 -4 -2 QO 2 4 6 6 ——re{z}—> FIGURE 5.11 Path analysis for the asymmetric linear tailored gain ramp waveguide of Figure 5.9 From Figure 5.8 we note that in the sector |4z| < 4, |Bi(z)| is exponentially The peak intensity within the waveguide occurs when the line L is tangent higher than those on any other branch. Of these modes, the vy = 1 mode has the ~ 182 - §5.8 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide largest. spatial overlap with the lateral gain profile and hence will be the lasing Similar arguments can be applied to both the (0) and (—) branches. The The path of the argument of the Airy functions for the (0) branch is plotted more complicated for waveguides in which |wé| — 0. — 183 - §5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues Once it has been determined that the contribution of Ai(z) dominates that due key 22 eigenvalue ny: 1 w* —_-> 5.9.2 Ny = no - where the v*" zero of Ai(z) is approximately given by (Equation (5.7.1)) 2/3 After using the definition of w in Equation (5.3.4) for the case of gain guiding the (+) branch: ny ~ fig — Se and the parameter s is related to the guide parameters by Equation (5.5.3). We therefore see that in the complex 7 plane, the mode structure is particularly simple: — 184 - §5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues all the modes of the principal branch lie on a straight line emanating from the point order modes being more closely spaced together. Since the modal gain nyt) is related to 7, through y, = —2ko7, (Equa- tion (2.5.2)), V3 1/3 (5.9.6) 82 ~To- V3ko 2no and hence will be the lasing mode at threshold. At threshold, the modal gain A?) The mode discrimination between any two modes is given by | & (5.9.7) Ab) = of) — 4b), ~ vBko 2no &) = |v — ryt (5.9.8) is the spacing between the zeros of Ai(é). The mode discrimination scales sublin- Each lateral mode of the waveguide has a slightly different guide wavelength due to the different effective indices of refraction 7. Spectrally resolved nearfield — 185 - §5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues patterns ($3-5(c-4)) may be used to make visible the various lateral modes in a laser operated above threshold. The wavelength separation between any two modes is given by In an entirely analogous manner, formulae for the propagation constants of the Airy function: k2 sions for the eigenvalues nb): (5.9.11) ob) ~ Te + V3ko | — Ty - As before, the approximations for the eigenvalues on the (—) branch lie on a as accurate as Equation (5.9.6) for truncated waveguides in which ng 4 no — akok ~ 186 - §5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues because of the perturbation introduced by the truncated region at the lossy edge Modes on the (0) branch have nearly constant modal gains and are composed We have confirmed these results using the numerical methods of §2.7. Fig- between the zeros of the Airy function, as predicted by Equation (5.9.4). 85.10 Nearfield Patterns Qualitative features of the nearfield patterns of the eigenmodes of an asym- Quantitatively, this unusual property may be understood by considering the as a superposition of exponential terms: Ai(z) ~ be —1/2(_2)-1/4 (c et 32°?? +c" e817) (5.10.1) ~ 187 - §5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues (A) = 4 | — Ap: 3.415 FIGURE 5.12 Summary of the eigenvalues of the asymmetric tailored gain waveguide of Figure 5.9, — 188 ~ §5.10 Nearfleld Patterns The nearfield intensity for modes on the (+) branch is given by I(z) = |Ai(p + wa)? Writing Ai(z) as a single term asymptotic expansion, the nearfield intensity for the v*h mode becomes 3/2 2 I(x) ~ |(e + wa) W/4e-Flevtws (5.10.2) We desire to find the position of the maximum y, and the half-width w, of mode imaginary parts of p + wz are approximately equal. By introducing a coordinate — 189 - §5.10 Nearfield Patterns rotation such that one coordinate axis lies along £, and the other coordinate axis expression for Ai(z) to derive first order approximations for the electric field E(z). Level ines” of Ai(z) FIGURE 5.18 Geometrical construction to determine the position of the peak intensity x,. The Referring to Figure 5.13, we see that along the path L, |Ai(z)| reaches its sponding tangent lines are at an angle of —30°, which is precisely the angle that ~ 190 - §5.10 Nearfield Patterns £ makes with the negative real axis for the special case of no index antiguiding. happens when Lz = L(py —- xv) = +v3 (5.10.3) where the minus sign is used for the principal (+) branch. If we approximate p, derive an expression for yy: V3 ry -~ 7 , 5.10.4 It should be noted that, for a wide guide, the position of the mode within the AXy = v3 |2ngs|~1/3 6, (5.10.5) where s is given by Equation (5.5.3) and é, by (5.9.8). Equation (5.10.5) may be used to derive a particularly simple expression for gain and mode discrimination become A) = T'(xv) Ars) = gAxy first order, the mode intensity profile is approximately symmetric about its peak position, and that its width is much less than the width of the waveguide. - 191 - §5.10 Nearfleld Patterns To find an expression for the nearfield pattern, we write z in terms of the rec- tangular coordinates z = u/+7v! and rotate the coordinate system (see Figure 5.14) to new variables u and v so that u lies along the antiStokes line Zz = et2"/3 and v lies perpendicular to it (t.e., along L). vy! — > Ly! =F I20° FIGURE 5.14 Coordinate rotation of —24/3 = 120° for used in the calculation of the nearfield After making the rotation, near the antiStokes line associated with the (+) branch, the Airy function may be written as a single term asymptotic expansion Ai(ut+itv) ~ (u+ iy) M4 et 3(utiv)??? . (5.10.7) — 192 - §5.10 Nearfleld Patterns where we have dropped some unimportant global constants. The radicals may be . 3 3 2 (u+ iv)3/2 ww 3/2 i 4iz = (=) | 2u 8\u 1/2 Along the antiStokes line, v = 0 while along the line £ u is constant and Figure 5.13 shows that v is linearly related to the lateral position xz within the guide: 2 (5.10.9) t.= Substituting Equations (5.10.8)and (5.10.9) in (5.10.7), we find that the expression 5.10.10 which is a Gaussian centered at x, with half width w, multiplied by a linear phase variation ¢,, where x, is given by Equation (5.10.4), and wy, and ¢, are given by 1/4 Vrwe The intensity nearfield patterns may be found for the (—) branch in a similar approximately Gaussian in shape with essentially linear phase variations over the — 193 - §5.10 Nearfield Patterns — OF INTENSITY ©) ho PHASE 0 30 60 90 120 150 FIGURE 5.15 (a) the asymmetric linear tailored gain ramp waveguide of Figure 5.9, (b) the ~ 194 - §5.10 Nearfield Patterns region of appreciable light intensity. The linear phase variation reflects the fact The fact that the nearfield patterns of all of the modes are single lobed is a The experimental nearfield patterns of Figure 5.3 show a structure similar to gain laser is a complicated one, and is beyond the scope of this thesis. ~ 195 - §5.10 Nearfield Patterns The nearfield patterns of the low order eigenmodes of the tailored gain broad where the field does not penetrate. The critical guide width @* is approximately given by If 2 is sufficiently greater than £* so that part of the waveguide is pumped below These effects will be discussed further in §5.14. §5.11 Farfield Patterns Once E,(xr) has been found to have such a simple form, it is easy to find functions of the spatial variable z. Making use of the shift and convolution Fourier — 196 - §5.11 Farfield Patterns Transform theorems,® the intensity farfield pattern may be written as — e—(9-Or)?/227 where ¥{} denotes a (—1) Fourier Transform,(826) * denotes the convolution operation, and the emission angle ©, and beamwidth Ly, are given by Intensity farfield patterns for the (—) branch may be calculated similarly, and are, (5.11.2) in fact, identical (except for an unimportant global phase factor) to those on the Figure 5.16 summarizes the nearfield and farfield patterns for the first three Of some practical importance is the fact that the farfield patterns of the higher is borne out by the experimental data of Figure 5.3. -— 197 - §5.11 Farfield Patterns (A) NEARFIELD (B) FARFIELD GAIN [>> 0° (+) branch (O) branch INTENSITY (arb. units) 1 len O 30 60 90 120 S201 e2345 FIGURE 5.16 Summary of nearfield and farfield patterns for all branches of the asymmetric linear ~ 198 - §5.12 Effect of Fourier Transform Symmetry Relations on Farfleld Patterns §5.12 Effect of Fourier Transform Symmetry Relations on Farfield Pat- terns In this work, we have considered several examples from each of the four gen- The particularly interesting property that the farfield patterns of asymmetric Let us consider symmetry and asymmetry as it relates to Fourier Transform One possible approach would be to quote the Fourier Transform theorem which However, it is possible to give a much more satisfying answer that is based tion (2.7.1), (5.10.1), or the zig-zag ray model?° for a real index box waveguide). ~ 199 - §5.12 Effect of Fourier Transform Symmetry Relations on Farfield Patterns Inside any waveguide, the optical field may be considered as a Fourier super- Furthermore, since the waveguide’s farfield pattern is essentially given by the to the axis of a real index guided waveguide implies multilobed farfield patterns — 200 - §5.12 Effect of Fourier Transform Symmetry Relations on Farfield Patterns for the higher order modes, even if the nearfield pattern is asymmetric, as in the The case of an asymmetric complez valued function such as that of an asym- First consider the null-less nearfield patterns. Mathematically, Equa- The farfield patterns are given by the Fourier Transform of Equation (5.10.1). times an exponential of a linear phase term ¢. If we had kept the other term in ~ 201 - §5.12 Effect of Fourier Transform Symmetry Relations on Farfield Patterns Equation (5.10.1), we would arrive at the same result with ¢ replaced by —4; 1.e., It is a very beautiful thing to see such an abstract mathematical concept as pattern such as that of Figure 5.3. §5.13 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter In the interest of simplicity, the preceding analysis considered only the case definition of o in Equation (5.5.2), viz. o = —s(b+ 12). Rewriting o as o(b) = o(0) (1 — 18) (5.13.1) — 202 - §5.13 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter then loo(b)| = fw(0)| (1 +.82)4/6 (5.13.2) 2no (+) . Ny = No) + ei), v (5.13.3) where 6(+) = 2tan~ lb + %. The mode discrimination for the (+) branch becomes Ang (b) = (1+ 87)¥/8 cos w + sin e| Ant) (0) (5.13.4) V3 where » = ztan—1o. When compared with the special case of no index antiguiding, Mathematically, the effect of antiguiding on the nearfield patterns may be as these latter level lines are less strongly curved than those near the origin, the — 203 - 85.18 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter Zero of Ai (z) —» Re {z} O 30°(b=0) Level Lines Ai (z) <— Z(b=0) FIGURE 5.17 Effect of the antiguiding factor on the path of the argument to the Airy function When the antiguiding factor is included, the farfield beamwidth remains ap- process described in §5.2) allows a determination of the antiguiding factor. ~ 204 — §5.18 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter § +100 FIGURE 5.18 Effect of the antiguiding factor on the nearfield patterns. Antiguiding causes the To make an experimental determination of the antiguiding factor it is necessary contact varies between 100% at the left edge of the laser and 0% at the right edge, ~ 205 — §5.18 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter light will be emitted only where the gain is greater than zero. Knowledge of the The position of the off-axis farfield beam position ef) as a function of the published results. §5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers In §5.10 we determined the minimum width é* of a waveguide in terms of the This is confirmed experimentally by Figure 5.20 which plots the excess current it is advantageous to decrease the width of the laser. — 206 - §5.18 Measurement of the Antiguiding Parameter 5 Theoretical wv=\tmode 4 — j | iL | — Gain gradient (s = 2cm /um) FIGURE 5.19 Experimental determination of the antiguiding factor. Solid line: Plot of the ~ 207 - §5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers (A) (B) FIGURE 5.20 Light-Current curves for tailored gain broad area lasers. (a) Waveguide model for Decreasing the width of the laser is roughly equivalent to decreasing the gain We have seen that the beneficial effects of both good mode discrimination be- ),33 tensity (t.e., the high gain side of the waveguide effectively reducing the gain — 208 - §5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers gradient. While this will not affect the single lobed farfield pattern of the vy = 1 In any waveguide, the vy = 1 mode is always single lobed. In all except a The mode discrimination between the fundamental and the vy = 2 mode is The mode discrimination for this case has decreased to only 2.7cm~!; this Figure 5.22a shows a waveguide with a very small amount of gain tailoring. profile of the saturated guide by the dotted line. (The actual situation is much — 209 - §5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers GAIN-INDUCED FARFIELD PATTERN fe) 0.6 ee ns LATERAL DIMENSION O° FIGURE 5.21 Design considerations for tailored gain broad area lasers: mode discrimination. more complicated, and beyond the scope of this thesis.) The farfield patterns with gain saturation over a large fraction of the guide leads to multilobed farfield patterns. - 210 ~ §5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers WAVEGUIDE FARFIELD FIGURE 5.22 Effect of gain saturation on the farfield pattern of the vy = 2 mode. (a) weak gain Figure 5.22b presents another unsaturated guide (heavy solid line) and satu- We can therefore summarize some of the engineering tradeoffs which need to be considered when designing asymmetric tailored gain broad area lasers. - 211 - §5.14 Design Considerations for Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers Wasted GAIN * Higher Threshold Lower differential Better response to Higher power single sy No 1 ~ { ' ners 1 I Lower Threshold Higher differential quantum efficiency Less resistance to gain saturation Lower power single lobe operation FIGURE 5.23 Design tradeoffs for tailored gain broad area lasers. (a) Nontruncated waveguide These considerations are summarized in Figure 5.23, and have been borne out effects of gain saturation and will give relatively low power single lobed operation. §5.15 Conclusion In conclusion, we have come full circle. We started by stating that a uniform solved by introducing gain tailoring. (84-5(¢)) However, we discovered that in order — 212 - §5.15 Conclusion to make gain tailoring work, it was necessary to increase the interchannel gain It is interesting to note that, although we began by assuming that an array was However, one crucial question remains unanswered: What is the role of fila- of these exceedingly interesting questions is beyond the scope of this thesis. OO FD Tm |] HW me a -_ Pe Pe PF he — YO WHY Ob OH YW WoO WN DYN NY NY DY NY DN KY N YP KY KF RP RP Ye BR RR oe aannaana - 213 - Appendix Computer Program to Calculate Eigenvalues GUTS OF MODES PROGRAM by Chris Lindsey, Applied Physics Department complex dispersion function input complex effective index cneff [exp(+i beta z) convention] complex*16 function cdisp(cneff & index, t, nregion, k0) complex*16 k(nregion) subroutine interface (mt, k, L) complex*16 ct ct = k(L) / k(L+1) mt(1,1) = (1.0 + ct ) / 2.0 mt(2,2) = mt(1,1) return end — 214 - Appendix: Waveguide Eigenvalue Program 47 subroutine freespace (mt, k, t, L) 48 implicit real*8 (a-h), (o-z) 49 complex*16 mt(2,2), k(L), ct 50 real *8 t(L) 51 integer L 52 complex*16 i / (0,1.0d0) / 53 mt(1,2) = 0.0 54 mt(2,1) = 0.0 55 ct =i * k(L) * t(L) 56 mt(1,1) = exp ( ct ) 57 mt(2,2) = 1.0 / mt(1,1) 58 return 59 end 60 ¢ 61 subroutine mult21 (m, a, b) ! matrix multiplication routines 63 complex*16 m(2,2) 64 complex*16 a,b 65 complex*16 an, bn 66 an = m(i,i) * a + m(1,2) * b 67 bn = m(2,1) * a + m(2,2) * b 68 a = an 69 b = bn 70 return 71 end 72 ¢ 73 subroutine mult22r (ml, mr) ! mr = ml * mr 74 implicit real¥8 (a-h), (o-z) 18 complex*16 m1(2,2), mr(2,2), a, b, c, d 76 a= ml(i,41)*mr(1,1) + ml(1,2)*mr(2,1) 77 b= m1l(1,1)*mr(1,2) + m1(1,2)*mr(2,2) 78 ¢ = ml(2,1)*mr(1,1) + m1(2,2)*mr(2,1) 79 d = m1(2,1)*mr(1,2) + m1(2,2)*mr(2,2) 80 mr(i,1) =a 81 mr(1,2) = b 82 mr(2,1) = 83 mr(2,2) = 4d 84 return 85 end 86 C a7 ¢ calculate electric field 88 C 89 subroutine efield (npoints, x, xleft, xright, 90 & e, neff, wavelength) 91 92 implicit real+*8 (a-h), (0-z) 93 integer npoints ! number of x,e data points 98 complex*16 neff ! effective index of mode 99 114 ~ 215 - Appendix: Waveguide Eigenvalue Program real*8 wavelength ! wavelength in microns t(1) = 0.0d0 c here if we pass into a new region 210 200 300 call freespace (mf, k, t, kr) ! propagate over free space region call interface (mi, k, kr) ! then through the interface call mult21 (mf, a, b) ! get new a,b coefficients xt = 0.0d0 ekx = exp ( demp1x(0.0d0,xt) * k(kr) ) Cc — 216 - Appendix: Waveguide Eigenvalue Program c FARFIELD PATTERN (uses IMSL routines) qa nanan anananga subroutine farfield (x,nearfield,np,theta,fi,nfp,cut, parameter PWORK = 200 implicit real*8 (a-h), (o-z) real*8 x(np), lambda, mag2 complex#16 nearfield(np), cwork(npoints) real theta(*), fi (*) integer iword equivalence (work(1) ,iwork(1)) real*8 work(PWORK) integer iwork(PWORK) radtodeg = 180.0d0 / acos(-1.0d0) nextra = (npoints - np) / 2 ! get extra resolution by padding with do 101 j = 1, nextra ! zeros to the left and right of the 1=0 do 102 j = nextrat+i, nextratnp l=l1+1 do 103 j = nextra+np+1, npoints dx = x(2) - x(1) xx = (npoints-1) * dx fmax = 1.0d0 / ( 2.0d0 * dx ) df = 2 * fmax / (npoints-1) if (iword(npoints) .gt. PWORK) pause ‘farfield: work too small!’ fnorm2 = 0.0dO ! find areas where there is appreciable power 203 210 221 223 224 ~ 217 - Appendix: Waveguide Eigenvalue Program if (save .gt. fnorm2) fnorm2 = save flim = 1.0/lambda ! sin(90)/lambda jl = flim / df - 1 jim = max ( npoints/2 - jl +1 , 1 ) j2m = min ( npoints/2 + jl , npoints ) nipm = 2 * jl nfp = j2- ji+i 1=0 do 224 1 = 1, nfp c compute minus i transform req'd by exp(i beta z) convention 10 20 subroutine fftcem (cwork, npoints, iwork, work) integer npoints, iwork(*) real*8 work(*) do 10 i = 1, npoints cwork(i) = conjg(cwork(i)) call fftce (cwork, npoints, iwork, work) cwork(i) = conjg(cwork(i)) return end [4] ~ 218 — References Chapter 1 A. L. Schawlow and C. H. Townes, Phys. Rev., 112, p. 1940, 1958. T. H. Maiman, “Stimulated Optical Radiation in Ruby Masers,” Nature, R. N. Hall, G. E. Fenner, J. P. Kingsley, T. J. Soltys, and R. O. Carlson, Phys. M. I. Nathan, W. P. Dumke, G. Burns, F. N. Dill, and G. J. Lasher, Appl. M. Holonyak and S. F. Beuacqua, Appl. Phys. Lett., 1, p. 82, 1962. T.M. Quist, R. H. Rediker, R. J. Keyes, W. E. Kray, R. Lax, A. L. McWhorter, I. Hayashi, M. B. Panish, W. W. Foy, and 8S. Sumski, “Junction Lasers Which D. Botez, Appl. Phys. Lett., 36, p. 190, 1980. W. T. Tsang and R. A. Logan, Elect. Lett., 18, p. 845, 1982. H. D. Wolf, K. Mettler, K. H. Zshaure, Jap. J. Appl. Phys, 20, p. L693, M. W. Fleming and A. Mooradian, Appl. Phys. Lett., 38, p. 511, 1981. J. Salzman, T. Venkatesan, R. Lang, M. Mittelstein, and A. Yariv, “Unstable D. Botez and D. E. Ackley, “Phase-Locked Arrays of Semiconductor Diode Lasers,” IEEE Circuits and Devices Magazine, 2(1), pp. 8-17, January, 1986. [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] — 219 - References for Chapter 1 F. E. Birbeck, “A Gallium Arsenide Laser Array for Communications,” J. D. R. Scifres, W. Streifer, and R. D. Burnham, “Beam Scanning and Wave- D. R. Scifres, R. D. Burnham, and W. Streifer, “Phase-Locked Semiconductor D.R. Scifres, R. D. Burnham, and W. Streifer, “High Power Coupled Multiple D. R. Scifres, C. Lindstroem, R. D. Burnham, W. Streifer, T. L. Paoli, Elect. G. L. Harnagel, D. R. Scifres, H. H. Kung, D. F. Welch, D. P. Worland, P. D. E. Ackley and R. W. H. Engelmann, “High-Power Leaky-Mode Multiple- E. Kapon, J. Katz, A. Yariv, “Supermode Analysis of Phase-Locked Arrays of Semiconductor Lasers,” Optics Lett., 9, pp. 125-127, April, 1984. [24] [26] [28] — 220 - References for Chapter 1 KE. Kapon, C. Lindsey, J. Katz, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Chirped Array of C. P. Lindsey, E. Kapon, J. Katz, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Single Contact D. F. Welch, D. Scifres, P. Cross, H. Kung, W. Streifer, R. D. Burnham, J. Chris Lindsey, Pam Derry, and Amnon Yariv, “Fundamental Lateral Mode C. Lindsey, P. Derry, and A. Yariv, “Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers With Chris Lindsey, David Mehuys, and Amnon Yariv “Tailored Gain Chirped Ar- R. A. Smith, Semiconductors, 2nd ed., Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge, A. Yariv, Quantum Electronics, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, T. Tamir, Integrated Optics, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag New York, Chapter A. Yariv, Introduction to Optical Electronics 3rd ed., Holt, Rinehart & Winston, New York, p. 88, 1985. [34] [35] [39] [41] [43] [44] [45] [46] ~ 221 - References for Chapter 1 G. H. B. Thompson, Physics of Semiconductor Laser Devices, John Wiley G. H. B. Thompson, “A Theory for Filamentation in Semiconductor Lasers Yariv, Quantum Electronics [31], p. 545. Thompson [34], p. 535. William Streifer, Robert D. Burnham, and Don R. Scifres, “Symmetrical and Thompson [34], p. 380. H. C. Casey and M. B. Panish, Heterostructure Lasers A:Fundamental Prop- Thompson [34], p. 196. Casey and Panish [40], p. 75. R. N. Bracewell, The Fourier Transform and its Applications, 2nd ed., Mc- E. Kapon, J. Katz, C. Lindsey, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Control of Mu- H. Tempkin, R. A. Logan, J. P. Van der Ziel, C. L. Reynolds, Jr., and S. Frank Stern, “Calculated Spectral Dependence of Gain in Excited GaAs,” J. [47] [48] [49] [54] [55] ~ 222 — References for Chapter 1 C.H. Henry, R. A. Logan, and F. R. Merritt, “Measurement of Gain and Ab- Joseph Katz, Eli Kapon, S. Margalit, and Amnon Yariv, “Rate Equation J. Katz, E. Kapon, C. Lindsey, 8. Margalit, U. Shreter, and A. Yariv, “Phase- Chris Lindsey, unpublished; D. F. Welch, private communication. Kressel and Butler, Semiconductor Lasers and Heterojunction LEDs, Aca- Casey and Panish [40], p. A81. William Streifer, Robert D. Burnham, and Don R. Scifres, “Symmetrical Dietrich Marcuse Theory of Dielectric Optical Waveguides, Academic Press Dietrich Marcuse, Light Transmission Optics, 2nd ed., Van Nostrand, New M. B. Panish, “Heterostructure Injection Lasers,” JEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques, MTT23(1), 1 January, 1975. [11] [12] — 223 - References for Chapter 2 H. C. Casey and M. B. Panish, Heterostructure Lasers A:Fundamental Prop- Casey and Panish [1], p. B193. G. H. B. Thompson, Physics of Semiconductor Laser Devices, John Wiley William Streifer, Robert D. Burnham, and Don R. Scifres, “Symmetrical Thompson [3], p. 293. Casey and Panish [1], p. B213. H. D. Wolf, K. Mettler, K. H. Zshaure, Jap. J. Appl. Phys, 20, p. L693, Casey and Panish [1], p. B214. A. Yariv, Introduction to Optical Electronics 3rd ed., Holt, Rinehart & E. Kapon, J. Katz, C. Lindsey, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Control of Mu- H. Tempkin, R. A. Logan, J. P. Van der Ziel, C. L. Reynolds, Jr., and S. Casey and Panish [1], p. A252. Casey and Panish [1], p. B215. Chris Lindsey, unpublished [15] [16] [17] [28] [29] — 224 — References for Chapter 2 D. Botez, J. C. Connolly, “High Power Phase-locked Arrays of Index Guided T. Tamir, Integrated Optics, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag, , New York, p. 62, Casey and Panish [1], p. B214. S. Mukai, C. Lindsey, J. Katz, E. Kapon, Z. Rav-Noy, S. Margalit, and A. Casey and Panish [1], p. B212. Thompson [3], p. 300. William Streifer, Don R. Scifres, and Robert D. Burnham, “Analysis of Gain- W. O. Schlosser, “Gain Induced Modes in Planar Structures,” The Bell Sys. Thompson [3], p. 291. M. C. Amman, Elect. Lett., 15, p. 441, 1979. Casey and Panish [1], p. B208. Casey and Panish [1], p. B207. H. Tempkin, R. A. Logan, J. P. Van der Ziel, C. L. Reynolds, Jr., and S. T. Twu, K.-L. Chen, A. Dienes, S. Wang, and J. R. Whinnery, “High Per- Casey and Panish [1], p. A34. ~ 225 — References for Chapter 2 Dietrich Marcuse, Light Transmission Optics, 2nd ed., Wan Nostrand, New Casey and Panish [1], p. A36. Casey and Panish [1], p. A37. Casey and Panish [1], Chapter 2 Tamir [16], Chapter 2 Dietrich Marcuse Theory of Dielectric Optical Waveguides, Academic Press Yariv, Intro. Optical Electronics [9], p. 412. Casey and Panish [1], p. 75. R. N. Bracewell, The Fourier Transform and its Applications, 2nd ed., Mc- Thompson [3], p. 323. Eugen Merzbacher, Quantum Mechanics, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, New P. Yeh, A. Yariv, and C. Hong, J. Opt. Soc. A., 67, p. 423, 1977. Chapter 3 A. Yariv, Introduction to Optical Electronics, 3rd., Holt, Rinehart & Win- Amnon Yariv, “Coupled Mode Theory for Guided Wave Optics,” J. Quant. Yariv, Intro. Optical Electronics [1], p. 437. E. Kapon, J. Katz, A. Yariv, “Supermode Analysis of Phase-locked Arrays of Semiconductor Lasers,” Optics Letters, 9, pp. 125-127, April, 1984. [5] [17] — 226 —- References for Chapter $ C. H. Henry, R. A. Logan, and F. R. Merritt, “Measurement of Gain and Claude Cohen-Tannoudji, Bernard Diu, Franck LaLoe, Quantum Mechanics, Assem S. Deif, Advanced Matrix Theory for Scientists and Engineers, Halsted Yariv, Intro. Optical Electronics [1], p. 414. Dietrich Marcuse, Theory of Dielectric Optical Waveguides, Academic Press CTDL (6], p. 1169. A. Hardy and W. Streifer, “Coupled Mode Theory of Parallel Waveguides,” T. Tamir, Integrated Optics, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag, , New York, pp. 22-25, Chris Lindsey and Eli Kapon, unpublished. CTDL [6], p. 192. Allan W. Snyder and John D. Love, Optical Waveguide Theory, Chapman J. Katz, E. Kapon, C. Lindsey. S. Margalit, U. Streeter, and A. Yariv, “Phase- E. Kapon, C. Lindsey, J. Katz, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Coupling Mech- Lett., 44(4), pp. 389-391, 15 February, 1984. — 227 - References for Chapter 4 Chapter 4 E. Kapon, J. Katz, A. Yariv, “Supermode Analysis of Phase-locked Arrays of J. K. Butler, D. E. Ackley, D. Botez, “Coupled Mode Analysis of Phase- D. R. Scifres, W. Streifer, and R. D. Burnham, “Experimental and Ana- E. Kapon, C. Lindsey, J. Katz, 8. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Chirped Array of E. Kapon, J. Katz, C. Lindsey, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Control of Mu- C. P. Lindsey, E. Kapon, J. Katz, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Single Contact Chris Lindsey, Pam Derry, and Amnon Yariv, “Fundamental Lateral Mode G. H. B. Thompson, Physics of Semiconductor Laser Devices, John Wiley E. Kapon, J. Katz, C. Lindsey, S. Margalit, and A. Yariv, “Control of Mu- Appl. Phys. Lett., 43(5), pp. 421-423, 1 September, 1983. [10] [11] — 228 — References for Chapter 4 D. F. Welch, D. R. Scifres, P. Cross, W. Streifer, R. D. Burnham, and J. Yaeli, D. F. Welch, D. Scifres, P. Cross, H. Kung, W. Streifer, R. D. Burnham, J. pp. 1134-1136, 1 December, 1985. Chapter 5 Carl M. Bender and Steven A. Orszag, Advanced Mathematical Methods for C. Lindsey, P. Derry, and A. Yariv, “Tailored Gain Broad Area Lasers With Bender & Orszag [1], p. 570. J. Buus, “Principles of Semiconductor Laser Modelling,” IEE Proc., 132J (1), Bender & Orszag [1], p. 520. H. C. Casey and M. B. Panish, Hetrostructure Lasers A:Fundamental Prop- R. N. Bracewell, The Fourier Transform and its Applications, 2nd ed., Mc- Bracewell [8], p. 14. ~ 229 - References for Chapter 5 [10] T. Tamir, Integrated Optics, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag, , New York, p. 15, 11] A. Yariv, Quantum Electronics, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, [12] G.H.B. Thompson, Physics of Semiconductor Laser Devices, John Wiley [13] Thompson [12], p. 380. [14] Joseph Katz, Eli Kapon, S. Margalit, and Amnon Yariv, “Rate Equation — 230 - Men passionately desire to live after death, —PETER KROPOTKIN
n(z) = {4 ng =n9 Oot<2r
in regions 1 and 3 are imaginary, kz = kp = tg and the propagation matrix is
simply M = I2F)J;. The eigenvalue condition becomes
4itkg
tan(ke/2) = { —g/k tose square root —> antisymmetric modes)
which is the eigenvalue equation (2.6.6).
the analytic results rapidly become unwieldly. The multilayer slab approximation
to a continuous waveguide is a good one provided that k,l, is not too large. From
a numerical point of view the series of 2 x 2 matrix computations (2.7.10) are easy
to perform for any number of layers. D may be considered a function of n, with
considered, 7 becomes complex, and it is necessary to search a two-dimensional
parameter space Re{7} @ Sm{n}. The problem is further complicated because D
is not analytic due to the branch points arising from the square-root dependence
of k on 7 in Equation (2.7.2). Therefore, complex root finders which make use
of the analyticity of the function cannot be easily used. Furthermore, from the
point of view of semiconductor laser design, it is important to find all of the modes
with high modal gains, and especially the mode that has the highest modal gain
because that will be the lasing mode at threshold.
the task of finding the zeros of D is considerably simplified by the equivalent
technique of minimizing |D|. We find that it is not unusual for V|D| to be very
large, often as much as 102°. As a result, automated root finders often miss roots.
This problem can be minimized by making use of a contour plot of |D|; roots may
be approximately located merely by the structure they introduce into the contour
lines.
almost certainly a root within the area enclosed by box B, while there may be one
in the box marked C. Note that the minimum value of |D| in box B is 10%; the
gradients are so steep in this region that an automated root finder will probably
miss the root unless the program is given a good initial guess. Furthermore, it is
obvious that there are no roots to be found within box A; this is the most effective
way of insuring that all the high gain modes have been found.
W/.
——
complicated waveguide showing several regions of particular interest.
layer, using (2.7.1) with x = O taken to be the left edge of the layer to get the
electric field within the layer, then using (2.7.4) to cross the boundary, ete.
Finally, we remark that, if one starts with an a priori index and gain distri-
bution, the method applied here is valid only for the unsaturated waveguide (t.e.,
only at threshold). However, an iterative scheme could easily be devised which
includes the effects of gain saturation via the rate equations. The effect of gain
saturation is to reduce the mode discrimination between the modes; therefore, an
accurate model requires that all the high gain modes be identified. This can be
easily done with the method described here.
A listing of the essential parts of the MODES and the CONTOUR plotting
Two Coupled Lasers
since thus their work is really profitable.
of two coupled box waveguides. When two waveguides are placed close together
so that their optical fields overlap, an optical eigenmode of one of the individual
waveguides will not be an eigenmode of the composite two waveguide system. If
each waveguide supports only the fundamental mode, to an excellent degree of
approximation, the new eigenmode will be given by a linear combination of the
two individual waveguide modes. In a laser, the mode of the composite system
with the highest modal gain will be the lasing mode. We therefore need to find
an expression for this mode’s effective index, as well as its nearfield and farfield
pattern. |
coupled waveguides in §3.2, show which classes of coupled waveguides have phase
matching wavelengths in §3.3, and give a means of designing two coupled wave-
guides with a given phase matching wavelength in §3.1(a). We then take up the
effect of gain on weakly coupled waveguides in §3.4. Finally, the complex character
of the wavevectors for the case of two strongly coupled gain induced waveguides
makes these systems especially interesting; they are studied both theoretically and
§3.1 Coupled Mode Theory of Weakly Coupled Waveguides
adjacent waveguides may be found by use of the coupled mode equations. These
equations and their derivation have been extensively discussed in the literature;
thus here we merely present an outline of their derivation with a view to under-
standing their applicability and limitations when applied to the understanding of
Ne
Ne
(b) n2(x), and (c) the two coupled waveguides n(z).
trated in Figure 3.1. Refractive index distributions for the individual two guides
are given by n,(z) in Figure 3.la and n(x) in Figure 3.1b. The spatial refrac-
tive index variation for the combined two waveguide system, which is shown in
will often use the term “channel region” interchangably with “core region” and
“interchannel region” to refer to the cladding layer between the waveguides.
sumed normalized by Equation (2.6.4). We also assume without loss of generality
that 62 > 61. For many purposes, the mode propagation constants B12 = kom,2
are more convienient to use for analytical calculations than are the mode effective
indices 71,9; we will use both formalisms interchangeably.
of weak coupling, E may be approximated as a linear combination of the electric
E(z, 2) = 5 { A1(2) Ei (2)e*4 + Ap(z)Ea(z)e*} tee, (3.1.2)
is, if the distance between the waveguides were infinite — A(z) and Ao(z) will
not depend on z and will be independent of each other since each of the two
terms on the right-hand side of (3.1.2) satisfies the Helmholtz equation (2.5.4)
separately. When the guides are placed in close proximity, an eigenmode of the
composite system has the property that the shape of the mode (t.e., the ratio
|A2(z)|/|A1(z)| is independent of z). This implies that (3.1.2) may be rewritten
as (83-2)
@ which relates the optical amplitude in one guide to that in the other.
de tC (3.1.5)
with
Py, K42
C | fe Bo. (3.1.6)
1k 9°
Ki = — 2 in (x) — ne | Ey(z)E2(z) dz . (3.1.7)
21 4Zo Jol 2
where Zp = ~ is the impedance of free space. The new propagation constants
8 and the admixture factor g are given by the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the
tion of the perturbed matrix (3.1.6) also yields two eigenvectors, denoted E*(z),
BX =B+tVA2+ x2 (3.1.10)
coupling constant. The average propagation constant B and phase mismatch pa-
(3.1.11)
A=
Ill
al >
phase matching point. Obviously, identical waveguides will be phase matched at
all wavelengths, while nonidentical waveguides, having differing dispersion curves
(see Figure 3.3), will not be phase matched except at a possible phase matching
wavelength Xp. We note in passing that not all waveguides have a phase matching
wavelength; we will discuss this point further in §3.3.
izes a system of two coupled waveguides. Equation (3.1.12) shows that far away
from the phase matching wavelength 6 — oo and the supermodes are identical to
Et (z) — H P22 E~(z) — 3 Plz = (89 > 4) . (3.1.13)
becomes more equally distributed between the two waveguides. At the phase
matching wavelength 6 = 0, the admixture factor is unity, and equal power flows
Et(z) — | bz — E-(z) 1 jee (3.1.14)
where, by symmetry, |g| must be unity, and since all the quantities in (3.1.12) are
real, the phase of the fields can only be either 0 or 7. The inphase addition of the
(+—) supermode. Equation (3.1.14) also applies to two dissimilar waveguides at
e -
° LN LN
x INDIVIDUAL \
oO MODES
bk
= SUPER MODES
< ~~
(ep)
2 7
8 Ay f 2k LL an
Z ~~
= hase matchi
Ee eoint "
Os Np
ir \ No/
a \ a
L \
Ap
— Wavelength \ ——>
coupled waveguide system in Figure 3.2. The individual unperturbed dispersion
curves are indicated by the straight dashed lines, while the supermodes of the com-
posite waveguide are shown as the solid curves. The phase matching wavelength
is indicated by the intersection of the two dashed lines. Far away from the phase
matching wavelength, the dispersion curves for the two supermodes are asymptotic
the dispersion curves of the supermodes separate. The difference in the super-
mode propagation constants at the phase matching point is then simply twice the
cal waveguides, it is important to know the location of the phase matching wave-
length Ap. Given two arbitrary waveguides, the phase matching wavelength can
usually be found only by numerically solving the dispersion equation (2.6.6) for
each individual uncoupled waveguide separately. However, for the case of two
nearly identical coupled waveguides, it is possible to derive a general relationship
between the waveguide parameters so that two guides may be designed around a
predetermined phase matching wavelength (e.g., within the spectral gain curve of
GaAs).°
box waveguide, and write it as an explicit function of the parameters defining the
k- <(n _ n?)1/2
g = —(n? — n2)1/?
a box waveguide. Equation (3.1.15) is an implicit relationship among these five
§3.1(a) Calculation of the Phase Matching Wavelength
Oz;
resent the differences between the two waveguides. Since the dispersion equation
D(z?) = 0 is satisfied for the unperturbed parameter values, Equation (3.1.17)
A6(ne) + B6(no) + C6(A) + E6(€)+ F6(n) =0. (3.1.18)
where ke/2
= —3—— > + tan(ké/2)
coe etl 2) (3.1.20)
°= Tek)?
relationships may be obtained using first order perturbation theory;®” the present
method has the great advantage that it does not require a priori knowledge of
the electric field and power filling factors, and also that the method may be easily
extended to any waveguide for which the dispersion equation is known. It can
also be used to derive simple relationships between any other two or three of the
coupled mode theory. If we start with a guide with the parameters ne = 3.550,
An = ng— ne = 0.050, 21 = 1.0um, and require the phase matching wavelength to
occur at 0.85um, we find that a waveguide with An = 0.051 will phase match to
the first waveguide at A, = 0.846975446um if the width of the second guide has a
width £2 = 0.943274347um. Equation (3.1.19) does not exactly predict the phase
matching wavelength due the effect of the Coulomb self-energy term (see §3.2) on
n and the effect of higher order terms in (3.1.17), both of which have been ignored;
the exact phase matching wavelength was found numerically. The dispersion curves
for these two guides at infinite separation is plotted in Figure 3.3 along with the
electric field amplitude at three different wavelengths. Note that the fields become
less well-confined at longer wavelengths, and so the coupling between two adjacent
waveguides a fixed distance apart will increase as the wavelength increases. Also,
coupled mode solutions of §3.1 by plotting the exact numerical eigenmodes near the
phase matching wavelength (Figure 3.4) and far away from it (Figure 3.5). Close
to the phase matching wavelength the predictions of the coupled mode theory
appear to be correct: away from the exact phase matching wavelength, the optical
field is concentrated in either one or the other of the two guides, while at the phase
© |0.050 1.00
O05 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
— Wavelength » (,.m)—>
insets indicate the extent of the field amplitude relative to the guide width t at various wavelengths.
£=1.00 -£#0,.94+
2b
FA2uem
15
‘O 10 \,
Xx 5
Qa
5 | Mn
£& 5 F
-| 5 =
\p=0.846975446
a~b i i j L j j a i “yl i i —
ure 3.3 separated by 2um. Note that they compare well with the coupled mode theory predictions
of Figure 3.2.
the direction of longer wavelength the admixture factor (which is predicted by the
coupled mode theory to decrease indefinitely) actually increases towards a limiting
value of unity! The reasons for this behavior will be discussed in the next section,
3.999 £={|.00 £=0.94+
An=0.050 An=0.05I
SLE
2pm
05 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
— (pm) —>
for the waveguide of Figure 3.4. The dahsed line shows the dispersion curve of the individual
isolated waveguides of Figure 3.3. Note that the coupled mode theory prediction that power flows
in only one guide or the other when the waveguides are very phase mismatched is correct at short
wavelengths, but is incorrect at long wavelengths (or equivalently, large overlap between the fields).
§3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides
individual eigenmodes (Equation (3.1.2)),
tion (3.1.5)) first order in z, and
coupled waveguides in which the optical fields do not overlap strongly. However,
as we pointed out in Chapter 1 (and discuss further in §4.6), there are a variety
of reasons for wanting to make strongly coupled arrays. We therefore take up the
study of two strongly coupled waveguides.
combination of the individual waveguide modes, ignores the fact that even in the
case of a single isolated waveguide, the guided modes are an incomplete basis set
because leaky and radiation modes have been ignored.? We will show in §3.2(c),
however, that for the symmetric single slab waveguides we are interested in assem-
bling into laser arrays, the contribution of the leaky and radiation modes can be
safely ignored except for the case of very strong coupling.
waveguides that does not assume weak coupling (Assumption (2)) and explicitly
takes into account the nonorthogonality of the basis states EZ, 2(x) (Assumption
(3)). This theory is in many ways similar to the quantum mechanical approach
the H. 2 ion; hence the title of this section as “The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly
Coupled Waveguides.” (This problem has recently been treated by Hardy and
Streifer!! from a slightly different perspective.)
(as + [—n*(z)] —[-n*] > E(z) =0 (3.2.1)
and compare it with the time independent quantum mechanical Schroedinger
Equation
A? @
—-—-—;+V(zr)-—E = 0 12.2
soa + V (2) - Ep v2) (3.2.2)
we see that the equations are mathematically identical if we make the correspon-
dence
1k 2(z) + V(z) 2 E (3.2.3)
=+e— —-n'(z rz) - . 2.
k2 2m 7
between the quantum mechanical and electromagnetic theories. First, the time
dependent Schroedinger Equation is of first degree in the time variable, while
Maxwell’s equations are of second degree in both the time and spatial variables.
However, as we will show below, this difference is not important for the waveguides
of interest here. Secondly, there is no quantum mechanical analog of the optical
dispersion curve. Equation (3.2.3) shows the correspondence between the optical
wavelength and the quantum mechanical particle mass. Since the free space quan-
tum mechanical electronic mass is a fundamental constant of nature, the optical
analogy corresponds to considering only one wavelength. Finally, we note that
the effect of gain and/or loss may be conveniently included in the optical formula-
tion through a complex potential which has no analog in the quantum mechanical
§3.2 The Quantum Chemistry of Strongly Coupled Waveguides
real index guided dielectric slab waveguide is therefore essentially equivalent to the
quantum mechanical problem of finding the energy levels and wavefunctions for
a particle in a finite potential well. As remarked earlier, the problem of two
coupled real index guided dielectric waveguides is mathematically similar to the
quantum chemical problem of the Hydrogen molecule-ion. In particular, since
both the Helmholtz equation (3.2.1) and the Schroedinger equation (3.2.2) are
both Sturm-Liouville eigenvalue problems, we can adopt the powerful and elegant
Dirac notation of quantum mechanics to simplify the mathematical manipulations.
NIE >= B?|E> (3.2.4)
~ dx
n*(x) = nj(z) + n3(2) —n?
where n,(z), no(z), and ne are given by Figure 3.1.
We keep the LCAO approximation (Assumption (1)) by writing the electric
|E >= 41 > +¢2|2 > (3.2.6)
My|1 >= lS + Kni(2)| jl >= B2|1 > (3.2.7)
Soe; <1[X|j >= BS ~e;
j=l
21 — B°S21 H22 — B* S22
My =< 1¥{1 >
d2
=
= Bi +Cy
Noo = BF + Cy
Co
= 8; = / E,(z)Ej(z) dz for 1,7 =1,2
OO
[oe]
where for convenience we have used the normalization condition < 1|: >= 1 instead
of the power normalization normally used in electromagnetic theory for which
<1|t >= 2a (see Equation (2.6.4)).
S92 = 1. However, both of the electric fields of the individual waveguides are TE
modes and so they are not orthogonal: S}2 and S91 are non-zero. For real index
(62 -B7)S+Ry BF -B2+Cy
The solutions derived from (3.2.14) make no assumptions about the strength of
the coupling constant R12, and are limited only by the validity of the assumption
that the total electric field may be written as a linear combination of the individual
electric fields in Equation (3.2.6). This is usually a very good assumption; however,
we will briefly discuss the limit of its validity in §3.2(c).
note one major difference between the coupled mode formulation of this problem
in Equation (3.1.8) and the LCAO approach summarized by Equation (3.2.14).
the waveguides of interest here.
tion is second order in the spatial z variable. However, in the derivation of the
coupled mode equations (3.1.5), an adiabatic approximation (Assumption (2)) has
been made which assumes “slow variation” of the A;2(z) in Equation (3.1.2), ef-
fectively replacing 6? by @. For the adiabatic approximation to be valid, it is
Using Equations (3.1.2) and (3.1.10), we can write Aj (z) as
At (z) = At VA? +0?)2 (3.2.16)
A+ VA24+K2 < fio. (3.2.17)
guides by overestimating the left-hand side and underestimating the right-hand
0 0
= Ay <
A 5 An< 5 An
k CO
1 ko 2ko Zo
< -— (2nA ~ koA
<4% (2nAn) 3 oAn
B12 > kone .
(3.2.15) is a good one. (In fact, for a typical laser waveguide, the left-hand side
of (3.2.15) has been overestimated by several orders of magnitude!) We therefore
conclude that the adiabatic approximation of Assumption (2) is never violated in
the waveguides of interest here. This also implies that the presence of the squared
terms in Equation (3.2.14) are not important.
from the corresponding LCAO (3.2.14) by (1) multiplying Riz by 1/2 to account
for the fact that the coupled mode theory expression for the electric field ((3.1.2))
is written in terms of complex exponentials and complex conjugates, whereas the
LCAO electric field ((3.2.6)) is not; (2) taking the different normalization conven-
tion for < 1|t > into account by multiplying Riz by 81,2/2koZo; (3) ignoring the
mode nonorthogonality by setting S = 0; (4) absorbing the Coulomb term C12
into the propagation constant BF 93 and finally by (5) dividing through by B12.
of the overlap integral S. This term is nonzero because the two overlapping TE
modes are not orthogonal to each other. The effect of the overlap integral becomes
increasingly important as the two waveguides become more closely coupled. Un-
fortunately, we find that for the general case of two phase mismatched waveguides
the effect of this integral is about the same order as the effect of the Coulomb
and resonance integrals. In the coupled mode formulation of the problem, the
individual propagation constants $12 appear only in the diagonal elements of the
matrix Equation (3.1.8), and hence the Coulomb term C’ may be absorbed into the
propagation constant. However, in the LCAO formulation, the individual guide
propagation constants also appear without C in the off diagonal matrix elements of
As a result, the exact analysis becomes analytically intractable due to the large
cases. We start with two identical coupled waveguides, for which Equation (3.2.14)
B-B+c (@P-B)S+R|_,
(2?-B)S+R f-f? +0
+)2 _ 792
aes: , (3.2.20)
(ee .
1-S
The splitting between the eigenvalues is given by
R-CS
(st)? — (67)? = 2-—=> (3.2.21)
This gives the well-known coupled mode theory result that when C and S are
ignored, the splitting is given by twice the coupling constant. When the effects of
the nonorthogonality of the TE mode basis states and the Coulomb integral are
included, the splitting between the eigenvalues becomes greater than the coupled
mode theory predicts. The term (1 — S?) in the denominator of (3.2.21) shows
25r
(++) —
20/- mode
A 5k
5 10k o™
x F
ie 0
1 <5
© ek
-15- «<—— CUTOFF
(+-)
mode
women Moo i l j i
(ea) 5 4 3 2 }
— Separation d (jzm)—>
index of the highest order supermode below the cladding effective index, and into cut-off.
on the number of guided supermodes. This is illustrated in Figure 3.6, which plots
the effective index n* as a function of the separation d between two waveguides.
As S — 1, the term (1— S) in Equation (3.2.20) goes to zero faster than does the
term (R —C), and so (6~)? decreases relative to (3); however, since (8~)? can
never be less than 62, the (+—) mode is eventually driven into cut-off and we are
left with a single mode system.
elements (« or R) into the optical Hamiltonian. By rediagonalizing this perturbed
matrix, we obtained the supermodes of the coupled waveguides, and since we
started out with a basis set consisting of two elements, we expect to find two
supermodes — which we do, provided that the overlap between the fields ts small.
When the effect of the overlap integral is considered, it becomes apparent that
the original basis set does not span a true two-dimensional space, and in fact,
in the limit that the distance between the waveguides decreases to zero, the two
guides become one — with only a one-dimensional basis set, and hence only one
“supermode,” the (++) mode, remains.
the two waveguides decreases. In that limit, the resonant coupling integral R
becomes almost identical to the Coulomb integral C so that (et)? approaches
(81)? + C, which is simply the value that first order perturbation theory gives for
the change in 8? for the fundamental mode of a single waveguide that has been
perturbed by doubling its width.
ipated by considering the two waveguides in the limit 4 — oo. In that case, the
wavelength becomes very much larger than the dimensions of the coupled wave-
guides. The electric field is then so poorly confined that it comes to resemble
the field of a single-element waveguide twice the width of the original one. (cf.
(b) Two Nonidentical Waveguides
account the differences in the propagation constants but ignoring the the Coulomb
integrals C,2. This case corresponds closely to the coupled mode theory of §3.1
except that we now explicitly include the effect of the overlap integral. In this
way, we will be able to show that the effect of the overlap integral is to decrease
the effective phase mismatch between the two individual waveguides, thus leading
to admixture factors that approach unity as the overlap increases — exactly as
shown by Figure 3.5.
This equation has the solution
? RS 1 1/2
+)2_ 32 _ n2 2
(s+)? = B Stoo (4) +R?) (3.2.23)
A =1/2(67 — 63) (3.2.24)
~281 2A
the limiting case S — 0 Equation (3.2.23) reduces to the equivalent coupled mode
theory results of Equation (3.1.10). We also see that at the other extreme, when
S — 1, the effect of the overlap integral is to decrease the effective phase mismatch
A’ relative to its coupled mode theory value A (recall that when comparing coupled
to unity as S — 1.
In the limit S > 1, A’ < R and (87)? becomes cut-off, as before. The
propagation constant for the remaining (++) supermode is then given by
(87)? ~ B? + Ro
a= se tll- Ss")
(G3 —B?)S+R
Be — B?
(A-—Ra)S+R
A+ Ra
the limiting admixture factor as S — 1 becomes
(6-—a)(l—o)+1
+oa6* -
matter how badly phase mismatched the two waveguides might be when they are
far apart, as they come closer together (or the wavelength increases), the overlap
becomes stronger, and the effect of the phase mismatch on the admixture factor
becomes weaker, thus leading to roughly equal power flowing in each waveguide.
(c) Breakdown of the LCAO Theory
tion (2) in the derivation of the coupled mode theory) is never violated for
GaAs/GaAlAs dielectric waveguides, and we have developed a more accurate
theory which relaxes Assumption (3), that the individual eigenmodes be orthogo-
nal. We now briefly examine the single remaining approximation inherent in both
the coupled mode and LCAO theories. Assumption (1) on page 79 states that the
total electric field may be written as superposition of the two individual waveguide
fields in Equations (3.1.2) and (3.2.6). To simplify the analysis, we consider the
special case of two identical guides. The symmetry of the problem implies that
the admixture factor must be unity. The coupled mode theory and the LCAO
theory will give different values for the propagation constants, but both theories
must yield the same admixture factor of unity.
lines) which were obtained numerically using the MODES program($?-7) and the
equal admixture of the individual waveguide fields which are separated by varying
amounts (solid lines). The waveguide parameters are ne = 3.50, An = 0.01,
£=0.5um, and 4 = lum. Portions of the individual electric fields are indicated
by the dotted lines, while the shaded region corresponds to the overlap between the
two fields. In Figure 3.7a with a separation d = 2um between the two waveguides,
we see that although the overlap is fairly large (approximately 40%), there is only
a very small difference between the superposition field and the exact field, thus
indicating that the superposition hypothesis is a very good one even when the
overlap integral is quite large. As the separation between the guides decreases
to lum in Figure 3.7b, the differences between the exact and superposition fields
(2m)
modes for strongly coupled waveguides (a) separated by 24m (b) separated by lum (c) just touch-
ing.
of course, because the exponential decay of the field in the cladding region depends
§3.3 Coupled Waveguides Without a Phase Matching Wavelength
matching wavelength Ap in determining the properties of two coupled waveguides,
and described a method for designing a coupled waveguide structure with a given
Ap in §3.1(a). We will now show that the class of real index guided waveguides
typified by those of Figure 3.4 in which 6(n) - 6(2) < 0 are the only types of
coupled waveguides which have a phase matching wavelength. In particular, we
will show that a technologically very important class of waveguides, two ridge
guided structures (see Figure 2.5), are not phase matched at any wavelength.
gions of the low index upper cladding layer in a standard four layer heterojunction
laser such as that of Figure 1.3a. In a ridge guided structure the only parameter
that can be conveniently varied is the width of the guide and the etching depth. In
an array of such ridge guided waveguides, it is not technologically possible to easily
and controllably vary the etching depth across the array; hence, for all practical
purposes, the only degree of freedom is the width @ of the waveguide(s). Therefore,
for this type of guide 6(n) = 0 and 6(@) # 0. The index profiles for two such ridge
waveguides are shown superimposed by the solid and dashed lines in Figure 3.8a.
The first waveguide, denoted by the solid curve, satisfies the Helmholtz equation
(3.2.1)
index of the solid curve in Figure 3.8a, and |s > represents the corresponding
electric field of the fundamental mode for that waveguide. The refractive index
ng(z) of the second guide is indicated by the dashed line in Figure 3.8a. The core
(A)
nok ~~ ee |
Ng x
Ne a | -
@) yd
0 8n(x)}
a rt} &(n)
ng (x)
3(n)
0 Sn(x) |
(C) _ 4
r 4 3(n)
i] 4
oLnts) L
—el Me 8( 2)
ridge laser suitable for use in phased arrays; waveguides and schematic dispersion curves for various
cases (b) dn = 0, 64 4 0 (air ridge) (b) 6n #0, 62 = 0 (c) 6n £0, 64 4 0 with 6n-6£< 0. The
solid curve represents the first waveguide, the dashed curve the second.
§3.3 Coupled Waveguides Without a Phase Matching Wavelength
n2(z) = n2(zr) + 6n(z) (3.3.2)
€
83 =< s|Nals >
=< 3|N, + k26n(z)|s > (3.3.3)
= B+ kT ee+5()An
The phase mismatch parameter A = }(84 — (5) is then given by
agation constant n, depend upon the wavelength, they are both positive definite
quantities, and so the sign of A is the same as that of 6(@). As a result the two
dispersion curves never touch or cross; t.e., two coupled ridge guided waveguides do
not have a phase matching wavelength. A schematic dispersion curve for 6(£) both
positive and negative are shown in Figure 3.8a. The two curves touch asymptoti-
cally as \ —- 0 or oo, but due to the absence of a phase matching wavelength, do
not touch in between.
the corresponding 0D/dz,; must be zero if the guides are to be phase matched at
Ap, which is not true except fortuitously. Equation (3.1.17) is better for numerical
calculation because it does not require a priori knowledge of the Tp, while the
method of this section has the advantage that it shows the general trends and
gives the correct result for the case 6(n), 6(£) # 0 with 6(n) - 6(€) > 0 (the latter
result is not readily apparent from Equation (3.1.19)).
matching wavelengths are those for which an increase in one parameter is offset by
a decrease in the other — t.e., 6(n) -6(£) < 0 with the ratio between the two given
by Equation (3.1.19). To summarize these results, schematic dispersion curves for
the other various types of waveguides are presented in Figure 3.8.
point has an extremely important consequence for the operation of an array of
such lasers because it implies (through Equations (3.3.5), (3.1.12), and (3.1.3))
that the only supermode with a single lobed farfield pattern, the fundamental
(++) supermode, is preferentially concentrated in the wider waveguide. We show
in §4.4(a) that this idea extends itself in a natural way to chirped arrays of ridge
guided lasers with widths that vary monotonically across the array. The spatial
segregation of the (++) supermode in one half of the array, and of the (+-)
supermode in the other, combined with a nonuniform gain profile designed to
favor the fundamental supermode, provides the clues we need to design an array
which will have a single lobed farfield pattern. The chirping concept is extended
to gain guided arrays in §4.4, and ultimately leads to the concept of a tailored
§3.4 The Effect of Gain on Weakly Coupled Waveguides
analysis, we make use of the coupled mode theory for weakly coupled waveguides,
and note that extension of the results to the more strongly coupled case using
LCAO theory is possible. We will discuss strongly coupled gain guided lasers from
a slightly different perspective in §3.5.
We write the complex propagation constant as P12 = B12 + iBy 2 with By. =
71,2/2, where 1,2 is the power modal gain of the first (second) mode. We then
write the normalized mismatch parameter 6 = 68+16y where 68 = (61 — B2)/2K is
the normalized phase mismatch and 67 = (B1—Bo)/2k is the normalized amplitude
gain mismatch.
as p= = lo|* eid. its behavior is described in Figure 3.9. When |6+4| < 1, sin! 6y
is real, and so the gain mismatch does not appreciably affect the optical intensity
[ 8B=0
Im? +h
8B=0 “eh wy (OF 4
8% =-sing a + J
o +t
a(p=0) = IF 7
¢ Re? ZO ]
b o 4
til
5 ORT a 7
l j 1 L i
001 i 2 3 4 5
NORMALIZED GAIN MISMATCH, 8Y
angle ¢ (b) intensity |g|?.
tinuously with éy as shown in Figure 3.9a.
supermode (solid arrow) and ¢~ = 7 for the out-of-phase (+—) supermode (dashed
arrow). As 6y increases, so does ¢. When 67 = 1 (t.e., By — Bo = 2k), |o*| =1
and gt = —r /2, so that the modes become degenerate. They then have the same
propagation constant and field distribution, and have 7/2 phase shift between the
individual waveguide fields.
the phase matching wavelength. When |64| > 1, the relative phase shift between
§3.4 The Effect of Gain on Weakly Coupled Waveguides
most of its power in one channel, and the optical field of the other supermode is
concentrated in the other channel.
Figure 3.10 plots the intensity admixture factor \al? and relative phase angle
@ for the (++) supermode versus the normalized phase mismatch parameter 68
~—- O.4e7
us O.37r
OU
Ney 8Y<0: ¢--¢
(3B, 8% >0) o ~-7->
O | 2 3 4 5
when |6y| > 1, none of the supermodes can have an admixture factor || = 1 even
at the phase matching wavelength 68 = 0, and that the intensity admixture factor
| ol” does not depend on the sign of 6. We therefore conclude that if equal power
is to flow in each waveguide, they must be both phase and gain matched.
ure 3.5, but with 6y > 1. We see that as \ — oo, the intensity admixture factor
approaches unity while the relative phase difference approaches 0 for the (++) su-
permode and z for the (+—) supermode. Comparison of two coupled waveguides
without gain in Figure 3.5 with the same two waveguides with a gain mismatch in
Figure 3.11 shows that as 4 — oo, the effect of the gain mismatch becomes sub-
dominant to the phase mismatch, and that eventually both of these are overcome
by the effect of the overlap integral.
of this section works. for weakly coupled waveguides, we will find in §4.4(a) that
it gives entirely tncorrect results for the case of a strongly coupled gain guided
real index guided waveguides, we found two new modes to describe the field in the
composite cavity. When we considered that the two individual waveguide modes
are not orthogonal in §3.2, we found that the strong coupling drove the higher
An=|.00 An=0.051
y=l100cm-! y=l06 cm!
es
| 3.575 oy /\
Cc
— | O
E(x)=|E(xle'#*? Xo
| 4 | oT | l | |
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 35 40
Note that the admixture factor is not unity at the phase matching wavelength. At longer wave-
lengths, the solutions are very similar to those of Figure 3.5.
100 F r “0
Tem”) | | | | | | | ” 2
~200F - @
(B) °F 1
vei v2 ‘
he ~
Fd € -40b + 4
ws —
z ~
Ow -
0.87 z °° |
u . -lOmrb Pant
4B 0.69 g
=<
yr O0.4eb -2.09rF a L
a ui -120 3 4
O.29- = +
0.0w- -3.07- &
-O.29 |
-160F 4
(C) 4
ve3 ved *
~200 i i J
pa 3.4130 3.4435 3.4440 3.4145 3.415
ul
E —Re {1}
-LOWwh Owk
Ww
¢ “lSeh
a -awP
-2.0r-
[eas Ss Sa Sm fd i L
10-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 “10-5 O 5 10 15 20 25
LATERAL DIMENSION
(pm)
(b) nearfield patterns for the expected vy = 1 and vy = 2 supermodes (c) nearfield patterns for the
unexpected v = 3 and v = 4 supermodes (d) modal diagram.
mode gain waveguides, we find an entirely unexpected surprise: as is illustrated
in Figure 3.12, even if each individual gain waveguide supports only one guided
peaks, while that of the y = 4 supermode has four, and that the number of
approximate nulls in the nearfield pattern is one less than the mode number. This
suggests that the unexpected vy = 3 and vy = 4 modes are higher order modes of the
composite structure. The reason why we obtain four modes when we expected only
two is not fully understood at the present time. However, we will now examine
some interesting aspects of gain guided waveguides that make them qualitatively
different from their more intuitive real index guided counterparts and which may
waveguide was single mode, perhaps in some sense it isn’t. We therefore first
examine the simpler case of two identical coupled real index waveguides each of
which supports two guided modes, and then consider the corresponding gain guided
case. We consider the four possible mode combinations Mop @ Yright: 1@1, 1@ 2,
2@1, and 2@2. The 1 @1 combination (coupling between the two fundamental
modes) is the usual one we have studied before; the nearfield patterns for the
inphase and antiphase combinations of the two fundamental modes are shown in
Figure 3.13b.
metry rules out the possibility of 1 ® 2, and 2 @1 (symmetric ® antisymmetric)
coupling (this is analagous to a quantum mechanical selection rule). Figure 3.13c
presents the inphase (v = 3) and out-of-phase (v = 4) supermodes of the coupled
AJ
By
4 fo)
1 1
¥ 0 4
T T
ae 4 4
nearfield patterns for the 1 @ 1 coupling (c) nearfield patterns for the 2 @ 2 coupling. Note the
similarities to the modes of Figure 3.12.
pattern for the vy = 3 supermode has three peaks, while that of the v = 4 super-
mode has four, and that the number of nulls in the nearfield pattern is one less
than the mode number.
(b) Leaky Modes of a Gain Induced Waveguide
the box waveguide that satisfy the boundary conditions at |z| = 2/2 but diverge
at infinity. These modes, referred to as “leaky” modes, are nonphysical because
they cannot be normalized to carry finite power. Such modes have been studied
in the case of real index guided waveguides!® but not, to our knowledge, in gain
guided structures. We briefly discuss these modes here because, although it does
not appear that they play a role in the coupling between two real index guided
box waveguides, they may play a role in explaining the two extra supermodes we
found in §3.5.
box waveguide which we considered in §3.5. Since the cladding loss T. =
—200cm™!, it is physically impossible for a guided mode to have a modal gain
smaller than this amount. The line y = —200cm™! therefore separates the physi-
cal guided modes from the nonphysical leaky modes.
the square root dependence of the wavevectors k and g on 7 in Equation (2.6.5).
We find that this waveguide has two solutions to the dispersion equation (2.6.6),
one of them corresponding to a guided mode, the other to a leaky mode. Use
of the CONTOUR program of §2.7 indicates that there are no other solutions in
the region indicated in Figure 3.14b. The nearfield patterns of these modes are
presented in Figure 3.14c; as expected, the intensity of the leaky mode diverges as
|x| + co. Notice that the leaky mode has a phase shift of 7 radians at the middle
of the guide; it therefore in some sense corresponds to the “cut-off” v = 2 guided
& “sh =
& g i
= ape qo
= r B o
oa
~ {Cc i "
= 00h () ve leaky" mode
4 ohysicai pole~7 .
3 -200F SW oa
<< . o
8 non-physical / g
ranch cut —~ vy
= sook branch cu =
ieed <
© -aook
a “40Cr " ;
leaky mode 4 lus lr
+ cond
wn Orr
~500 i i L Om
36 40 ag 46 5 $4 g
- = . mite
—Re{n}—— 2 oSnb
4 -20b
wi One
wn -30
< a
z ~OSerb -anb
tl Gr -S9 i :
LATERAL DIMENSION (ym)
modal diagram showing one guided and one leaky mode (c) nearfield patterns for the vy = 1 and
leaky mode.
of the coupled gain guided waveguide system of Figure 3.12 reveals that there is
approximately a phase shift of 7 radians between each of the peaks in the nearfield
patterns for the higher order modes. This suggests that although leaky modes do
the coupling between two lasers significantly different than that between two real
index guided lasers. Experimentally, we find a standing wave pattern between
two gain guided lasers that is not observed between real index guided lasers. We
perimentally investigate the coupling between two gain guided lasers.!’ The laser
stripes were delineated by using proton implantation, the separation between the
centers of adjacent stripes being 94m. Separate contacting was accomplished by
using two-level metallization. The threshold current of each individual laser was
typically 60mA (pulsed operation). A schematic cross section of the device used
for this experiment is shown in Figure 3.15a.
ious multiples of 94m, were obtained by imaging the nearfield of the lasers on
the entrance slit of a spectrometer and displaying the output on a monitor using
a silicon-vidicon TV camera. The spatial intensity distribution of the coupled
modes at a given frequency could then be obtained by scanning a selected line of
the video signal.
lengths which were ~ 50 to 100 Angstroms longer than the wavelengths of the
individual laser modes, and the spectral width of the phase locked lasers was con-
siderably smaller than that of the individual ones. When the interacting lasers
were separated by more than 18um, gain had to be introduced into the coupling re-
gion (by pumping current through the intervening stripes) in order to obtain phase
locked modes. The nearfield pattern of a phase locked mode consisted of two main
lobes, located approximately below the centers of the coupled laser stripes, and
laser coupling current laser
current | current
isolation —— ——
@) 9 18 al 6
spectrally resolved nearfield pattern demonstrating phase locked operation (c) theoretical nearfield
pattern.
current injection J, and J3 form the two gain guided lasers with J» controlling
the coupling between them. The coupled lasers operated in essentially a single
longitudinal mode, at \ ~ 0.88 um, thereby showing phase locked operation. Fig-
ure 3.15b shows the spectrally resolved nearfield pattern of two lasers separated
by 27um. Thirteen approximately equally spaced fringes are visible.
the lasing modes hopped to shorter wavelengths, resulting in a tuning range of
~ 50 Angstroms. When this current was further increased, the lasing mode hopped
back to longer wavelengths, but the spatial mode pattern was now different. This
behavior repeated at still higher currents through the intermediate stripe. Fig-
ure 3.16 shows the evolution of the spatial mode pattern of the phase locked modes
of two lasers separated by 18um for two sets of laser currents J; and J3. For all
the spectrally resolved nearfields of Figure 3.16, the wavelength is A ~ 0.88ym.
It is clear that the separation between the secondary peaks in the mode pattern
the curved phase fronts in a gain guided laser cause power to flow outward from
the laser axis.(82-6()) As a result, the evanescent lateral wavevector g in Equa-
tion (2.6.5) is complex. When two gain guided lasers are placed in close proximity,
the radiating modes of the adjacent gain guided lasers interfere to form a lateral
standing wave pattern in the intervening region.
current (1.e., interchannel gain) is increased, the spacing between the fringes also increases.
be written as an evanescent exponential (1.e., |E1,2(z)|* — 0 as |z| — oo) so that
we can express the (unnormalized) electric field to the right of the solitary guide
as
by an angle 9 = sin-1(9 /ko) with respect to a plane normal to the mirror facets.
Note that in a real index guided laser, g = 0, and so the phase fronts propagate
normal to the mirror facets. When we calculate the nearfield intensity pattern
I,(z) = e729" . (3.5.3)
exponential.
distance s. We take the origin to be located midway between the two guides. The
individual fields are given by expressions similar to Equation (3.5.1). The total
Erotal(t) = Ex(x) + E(x) =e (@+8/2)9 4 et(2-s/2)9 (3.5.4)
and the nearfield intensity between the waveguides is
Trotai(z) = 5(€ 297 4 e292) + cos 2gz . (3.5.5)
between the two electric fields, expressed by the cos 2gz term, leads to a standing
wave pattern which makes visible the imaginary part of the complex wave vector
g-
fronts of the interfering fields, larger angles giving more closely spaced fringes.
Equation (3.5.2) shows that this angle increases with increasing difference between
the peak gain under the laser stripe and the gain in the region outside the laser
stripe.(32-6(6)) The period of the interference fringes in the pattern of the phase
locked modes increases when the region between the coupled lasers becomes less
lossy, which is experimentally verified by the results of Figure 3.16. We also note
that increasing the interchannel gain will decrease the phase front curvature of a
mode(§2-6(5)) because less power needs to flow from the high gain regions of the
mode to the low gain regions, thus possibly leading to a decrease in the astigmatism
Phased Array Lasers
Results without causes are much more impressive.
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
many coupled waveguides. The coupled mode analysis of §3.1 is extended to a
uniform array of waveguides in §4.1, where we show why a uniform array has a
twin lobed farfield pattern. In §4.2 we introduce the idea of chirped arrays of
nonuniform lasers as a means of spatially segregating the fundamental supermode
from the higher order supermodes. Unfortunately, we find in §4.2(a) that given
current technological constraints, it is exceedingly difficult to fabricate a real index
guided chirped array, and in any event, such structures are almost certainly to be
partially gain guided. We therefore turn our attention to the possibility of using
the chirping concept in a gain guided array.
semble a rather exciting detective story (that even Sherlock Holmes might enjoy!)
which starts with a single clue — chirping — and evolves as we work out its con-
sequences, discover the limitations of the theoretical results of Chapter 3, modify
our ideas, and try again — and again... until we finally arrive at a working de-
standing of the lateral mode control problem in evanescently coupled phased array
semiconductor lasers.
channel gain for device performance. Since the region external to the array is
always lossy due to the unpumped GaAs active layer, this leads us to discuss the
interesting concept of the interplay between array and box modes in §4.3(a) and
4.4(a). We introduce chirped arrays of gain guided lasers in §4.4, and discover the
theoretical possibility of suppressing one lobe of a twin lobed farfield pattern in
§4.4(a). We discover gain tailoring in §4.5 and fabricate a device based on these
principles. The combination of gain tailoring and a high interchannel gain enables
us to achieve our goal of fabricating an array with a single lobed farfield pattern.
We demonstrate that such tatlored gain chirped arrays are able to operate with
both single lobed diffraction limited operation (1.5° beamwidth) or high output
power (450mW into 3.5°).
high interchannel gain, and pose the question: are such devices really arrays, or
should they be considered as tailored gain broad area lasers? This then leads
naturally into Chapter 5, where we fabricate and analyze a truly tailored gain
each individual waveguide, when isolated from its neighbors, supports only the
mode in the /**-channel. In a manner entirely analogous to Equation (3.1.2)
the total electric field for the array supermode may then be written as a linear
1 N .
E(x,z) = = )_ Aj(z)Ey(x)e? + ¢. c. (4.1.1)
2 l=1
of the A;(z) is due to the interaction between the waveguides. The coupled mode
z= ick (4.1.2)
between the fields so that coupling occurs only between nearest neighbors, and so
the only nonvanishing elements of the matrix C are Cul = 6, with 1 = 1,2,...N
and Cyi4a = Kii41s Cio = X41 with 1 = 1,2...N —1. The definition of the
coupling coefficients «,,; is the same as in the case of a pair of coupled waveguides
(3.1.7).
E’(z) = E(0)e?"? (4.1.3)
(C — B’I)E” =0 (4.1.4)
an array of N single-mode lasers. The eigenvectors E’, vy = 1,2,....N can be used
in Equation (4.1.2) to evaluate the nearfield of each supermode; each such mode,
say E”, describes a phase locked combination of the individual laser modes with
amplitude o7 Ey:
identical lasers on equispaced centers may be solved analytically. In this case
of the effective index (in the junction plane) was taken, for definiteness, as that
corresponding to an array of typical GaAs/GaAlAs ridge waveguide lasers such
as those of Figure 2.5. The channels are 444m wide and the interchannel spacing
is 2um; the index step An = 0.002. The supermode patterns were calculated
by using the numerical methods of §2.7, and confirm the predictions of the cou-
pled mode theory. The supermodes designated by v = 1,2,3,4,5 correspond to
(++++ +), (44+0-—-), (40 — 0+), (+-0+-), and (+ —+-—+) field
amplitudes in the various array channels, respectively. The +, —, and 0 sym-
bols indicate whether the field is positive, negative, or zero in the corresponding
t 3.413
(B) NEARFIELD FARFIELD
~“I0 O 1020 3040 -5
DIMENSION ANGLE
(2m) (degrees )
is 4um and the channel spacing is 2um with an index step An = 0.002. (a) refractive index
profile (b) intensity nearfield and farfield patterns. Note the envelope functions (dashed lines) of
the fundamental and highest order supermode nearfield patterns are very similar. The two modes
differ only in the lossy interchannel regions.
the two-element array studied in Chapter 2, while the highest order completely
antisymmetric supermode (+ —-+—-+) corresponds to the (+—) supermode in the
two-element array. It is clear that the nearfield envelopes (given by the dashed line
in Figure 4.1) of the y = 1 and the v = 5 supermodes are very similar. (In fact,
as shown by (4.1.6), in the limit of very weak coupling between the channels they
become identical.) The intensity nearfield patterns differ only in that the vy = N
supermode has nulls in the interchannel region. This has an extremely important
effect on the operation of a uniform array of semiconductors.
est in the core region of the waveguide; the cladding region is therefore relatively
lossy when compared with the core region. In a single-element semiconductor
laser, this minimizes the threshold current density and leads to more efficient
operation. (81-2) However, the very properties that lead to low threshold currents
in a single-element laser promote the undesirable twin lobed farfield pattern in an
uniform array. Since the highest order completely antisymmetric supermode has
nulls in the lossy interchannel region, relatively more of its light is concentrated in
the high gain core regions of the laser channels than is the case for the fundamen-
tal supermode. The highest order supermode therefore has a higher modal gain
than the fundamental supermode and will thus be the lasing mode at threshold.
This in turn leads to the undesirable twin lobed farfield patterns characteristic of
uniform arrays such as that of Figure 1.6d.
similar to that of an array of uniformly illuminated slits, and thus will have a
single lobed farfield pattern only if the elemental waveguides are closely spaced.
§4.2 Chirped Arrays of Real Index Guided Lasers
two supermodes that have unequal power distributions in each channel. If we
consider two coupled ridge waveguides of unequal widths, we know from the results
of §3.1 and Figure 3.8 that the fundamental supermode will be concentrated in
the wider channel. If we can then also preferentially concentrate the gain in this
channel, the fundamental supermode will have the highest modal gain and will
therefore be the lasing mode. This in turn should lead to the desired single lobed
farfield pattern.
in which the widths of the individual channels increase monotonically across the
array.* (The term chirp is borrowed from the communication theory term for a
signal with a temporal frequency that varies linearly with time; in a chirped array,
however, it is the spatial frequency which varies with distance). We consider real
index guided arrays in this section, and discuss and gain guided chirped arrays in
64.477
array with channel widths that are linearly chirped from 5um to 3yum across the
array. The channel spacing is uniform (2um). Comparison of Figure 4.1b (which
plots the mode profiles for a uniform array) with Figure 4.2c (which plots the
mode profiles for a chirped array) reveals a striking difference between the two
types of arrays. Unlike the uniform array, the fundamental supermode in the
chirped array is preferentially concentrated at one side of the waveguide, and the
completely antisymmetric supermode is concentrated at the other side.
1 i i i
ash J - 43.415
nt
45+ 4 3.413
t 44 7 (Cc)
= NEARFIELD FARFIELD
x“ 43b -
& 42 4
= 4iF 4 vel
oO
= 40} 4
ui ) tie
38r An0.002| |
38 f ng 3.413 7]
3.41377 7 vee
L H 1 L
—GUIDE WIDTH £ (um)
SSi=
-10 0 10 203040 -5 0 5
DIMENSION ANGLE
(ym) (degrees )
vary linearly between 5m and 3um in steps of 0.5um. The channel spacing is 2um, and the index
step An = 0.002. (a) plot of guide width @ vs. effective index 9. (b) refractive index profile (c)
intensity nearfield and farfield patterns. Note that the fundamental v = 1 supermode is located
to one side of the array and the highest order vy = 5 supermode is at the other. Also note that
despite the asymmetric nearfield patterns, the farfield patterns are all symmetric.
the other side of the array, their overlap with the gain distribution will be smaller,
make real index guided chirped arrays impractical. The fundamental limitations
result from the interplay between real index and gain guiding discussed in §2.3,
while the technological limitations result from the limited precision with which it
is possible to fabricate real index guided structures.
integration into arrays shows that if an array is to be considered real index guided,
the size of the built-in index step must be sufficient to overcome the antiguiding
effect due to the carriers. This implies that the built-in index step Avi must be
greater than about 0.003, and so a single mode waveguide must be no wider than
~ 2um (5um if the waveguide is allowed to support at most two modes). If 2um is
adopted as the smallest feature size, and 0.5 microns for the precision with which
the guide width may be varied, we see that at best we could fabricate a five-
element array with a maximum width of about 22um. The volume of the lasing
mode has then been increased by only a factor of four from that of a single-element
laser. Thus, we expect only moderately high power outputs from real index guided
chirped arrays.
match parameter between adjacent waveguides will be quite large. This is illus-
trated by Figure 4.3, which plots the nearfield pattern of the fundamental mode
fractive index profile, the same as Figure 4.2 but for various index steps Af; (b) the fundamental
-4 -2 0 2
FARFIELD ANGLE @
(degrees)
for An = 0.0025 the admixture factor between adjacent channels is 3:1, and thus
there is significant optical intensity in only the first two channels. Power may be
spread out over more of the lasers (t.e., the admixture factor may be decreased) by
decreasing the size of the index step; however, Figure 4.3 shows that as the index
step becomes even slightly smaller, the channels become more strongly coupled
and the fundamental mode shifts to the center of the waveguide. If the index step
is too great, power will be concentrated in only a few elements of the array. If
the index step is too small, the beneficial effects of the spatial segregation of the
supermodes is lost. Figure 4.3 indicates that it is therefore necessary to control
5-
! VERTICAL INDEX PROFILE
40Fr- oO i0k
x 3.385 ee eres
ce (5F n4 -| a
4
| a3
25
20+
—etpe— + 0.01 pm
l l
3.41 1° 0.5 1,0 1.5
— THICKNESS OF UPPER CLADDING LAYER t (ym)—>
thickness of the upper cladding layer.
which the channels must be etched. Figure 4.4 shows that the etching depth
occur over the array must be better than 200 Angstroms! At the present time this
is impossible.
to this precision, there is the question as to whether or not this device could be
considered a real index guided laser at all. Figure 4.5a shows the waveguide model
fe) &
r4 -200F ——J Unni
nn Sane Sn Gn FARFIELD PATTERN
(c) T T 7
rE
7)
Z a
ee ee ee 2 gain quided
(B) 306 Sot i envelope only
Ww a oe 4 z
a oa ~d
of
\ | on | | J J A. |
-20 0 20 40 “15 -i0 -5 ie) 5 10 15
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGEL @
(jm) (degrees)
(b) nearfield pattern for the chirped array of Figure 4.2 including the effect of gain. (c) Farfield
patterns (solid line) for the array of part (a), and (dashed line) for a gain guided waveguide with
a spatial gain profile given by the envelope function of the gain profile of the waveguide of part
(a). The nearly superimposed solid and dashed lines of part (c) indicate that the chirped array of
part (a) is essentially gain guided.
single lobed operation. The solid curve in Figure 4.5b shows the farfield pattern
the result of an asymmetric gain profile. Here, it provides a convenient measure
of the extent to which this chirped array should be considered either real index
or gain guided. The dashed curve in Figure 4.5b shows the farfield pattern for
a gain guided laser with no variation in the refractive index profile and with a
spatial gain profile that matches the gain envelope function for the waveguide of
Figure 4.5a. The fact that the two curves are almost superimposed indicates that
this array is almost entirely gain guided.
make the fabrication of real index guided chirped arrays difficult, if not impossible.
which confines the mode allows it occupy a larger volume of space. However, as
we have shown in §2.3 and §4.2(a), there is a lower limit on the minimum possible
index step due to the presence of gain, and that laser waveguides with index step
differences of Av < 0.003 should be considered as gain guided.
less desirable than those of strongly real index guided lasers, gain guided arrays
easier to fabricate than real index guided lasers, thus allowing more rapid
improvements in device design.
reducing the depth of the proton implantation. (§4-3)
real index guided laser. The modal volumes can therefore be much larger,
thus potentially increasing the device’s power output and decreasing the
beamwidth. Accordingly, all the high power records to date have been set
with gain guided lasers.
guiding reduces the effect of phase mismatching, effectively increasing the size
the formalism used in §4.1 to predict the supermodes of a uniform array of real
index guided lasers may also be used to calculate the supermodes of a weakly
coupled gain guided structure. However, for the more important case of strong
coupling, we must make use of the numerical methods of §2.7. This is especially so
because, as we will see in §4.4(a), the exact (numerical) results are quite different
from what we would expect based on a naive application of the theory of §3.4 to
strongly coupled gain guided lasers.
ignored for simplicity. Its exclusion in no way alters any of the conclusions we will
draw from our work. We will incorporate the antiguiding effect into our models
when appropriate. (82-2(e),4.5(6))
and (c) the modal plot for a uniform array of five lasers 4um wide on 9um centers.
Comparison with the corresponding Figure 4.1 for a uniform array of real index
~ Ty q i T
rf ANT 4100 cm! a 40k @v=5 4
- 1
~ 200 cm7! E +4
Oo
(B) — NEARFIELD FARFIELD ~ OF 7
z 3
_— +
© -40b et
vel a
Seo @ ;
ox +
6 -l20b 6 4
Qa +
| i L i _t
a 3.4142 4 6 8
—Re {n}—
LATERAL DIMENSION
L L Lt a \ 1
~20 0 20 40 60 -5 ie) 5
LATERAL FARFIELD
DIMENSION ANGLE
(42m) (degrees )
(a) gain profile (b) intensity nearfield and farfield patterns (c) modal diagram with the lasing
v = 5 supermode circled (d) phase plots for the vy = 1 and vy = 5 supermodes. Note the symmetric
farfield patterns.
of the lasers is the same for the vy = 1 fundamental mode, but that the effect
of the phase curvature is the same as that of a single-element laser. Since the
astigmatism of gain guided lasers is proportional to the phase front curvature,
this array will also be astigmatic.
ingly, the vy = 5 mode, which has nulls in the lossy interchannel regions, has the
highest modal gain. It is of interest, however, to note that the pattern of the modes
is reminiscent of a resonance curve. We will see below that a type of “resonance”
between the nearfield pattern and the spatial frequency of the peaks in the gain
distribution does occur. This concept will prove helpful in understanding strongly
ray structures in which the interchannel gain has been increased to enhance phase
locking among the array elements. Starting from an array picture, Figure 4.7a
shows the mode pattern and nearfield pattern for the lasing vy = 5 supermode (.e.,
the one with the highest modal gain) for a five-element array in which both the
interchannel regions and the region external to the waveguide have been pumped
to transparency. The mode pattern and nearfield pattern for the lasing mode are
V =
(a) 40F iS)
+ 30 p25 +t
2 49. ARAM e ++
S oo, = 20F
| tory
Oo 1 i i a lL 1 I i L i
40h
7. 30Fr
— Yicm
10 + +, L L 1 J. tL 1 iL 1
z 404 =
gq 0 Ss *
© -200 ~ 20r
0 30 60 |
LATERAL DIMENSION 1Or
(ym) fe) Ll Lo i L l Ll ! !
45 46 47 48 49 50 -20 0 20 40 60
—Re {n}—> LATERAL DIMENSION
(b) a “box plus array” and (c) a box waveguide.
in, we obtain the “array plus box” waveguide of Figure 4.7b. Note that, as might
be expected from elementary perturbation theory, the effect of the lossy external
region that defines the “box” has only a minimal effect on the eigenmodes because
the field is small in that region. The effect of the “box” may then be considered
as a small perturbation on the array structure.
box mode is very similar to the array and “array plus box” modes. In fact, another
way of thinking about the same waveguide of Figure 4.7b would be to start with
a uniform gain bor waveguide and add the array as a perturbation to form a “box
plus array” waveguide. Elementary perturbation theory predicts that the box mode
which has the greatest overlap with the high gain region of the perturbation (1.e.,
the array) will have the highest modal gain. The high modal gain of the v = 5
mode may then be viewed as coming about because the spatial frequency of the
perturbation (1.e., the array) is “resonant” with that of the vy = 5 bor mode (both
have five periods over the width of the waveguide), thus enhancing the modal gain
of the vy = 5 mode.
a strongly coupled uniform array either the “box plus array” picture or the “array
plus box” picture works equally well, although the “array plus box” viewpoint
is probably somewhat better. However, we will see in §4.4(a) that making a
distinction between the two perspectives aids understanding of strongly coupled
imately proportional to the overlap between the optical intensity profile and the
gain distribution inside the laser. If we make a chirped array of gain guided lasers,
the wider lasers should have higher individual channel modal gains than the nar-
rower ones, and hence in a manner entirely analogous to the way in which we have
effectively tailored the real index profile in a real index guided chirped array, we
the gain profile determines the eigenmodes as well as the modal gains to devise an
7 and the power modal gain + of the fundamental mode in a single-element gain
guided laser as a function of the width @ for a laser with a channel gain [9 of
85r It el ae
E +60
2° t
80F |e _~
o ‘¢
75- cS)
f 480 *
“> 70 <
& 440 4
o oO
65 40 |
i a
4-40
60+ a Q
7 —-80
vo Wd
55 4-120
Y single , two _ z
7 mode "modes 4-160 @
3.414 50- 7
1 L |
2 4 6 8 10
— GUIDE WIDTH 2 (pm)—>
effective index (solid line) and modal gain (dashed line) are shown for a gain guided box waveguide
as a function of the waveguide’s width.
4ym, the wider channels will have both higher effective indices and modal gains.
The theory of §3.4 then leads us to expect the fundamental supermode to be
concentrated in the wider channels. Since the gain is also greatest there, we then
expect the fundamental supermode to have the highest modal gain, which in turn
should yield the desired single lobed farfield pattern.
elements with widths ranging between 8um and 4ym in lum increments with
5um separations between the lasers. The heavy solid horizontal lines indicate
the effective refractive index in each channel, while the dashed lines indicate the
po ne a +40
~— 90 PITT T 4--+ t 4
BSE ‘ 4-1 40S
+ TOR ¥ 1780 8
| gs 88 4-120
3.414 607 2 3 4 S| 4-160 |
L—4 ~200
Figure 4.8 showing the variation of the channel index and gain. 58 and 6+ are the phase and gain
mismatch parameters of §3.4.
both the phase mismatch parameter 6G and gain mismatch parameter 674 of §3.4
are negative. Figure 3.10 then indicates that the fundamental supermode should
have more power in the wider guides than in the narrower ones. Since the con-
therefore hope that we might be on the verge of achieving our goal of designing a
laser array that favors the fundamental supermode.
the actual situation is very different from what we had anticipated. Figure 4.10
presents the modal distribution diagram for the first six modes of this waveguide.
To our surprise, we find that the fundamental supermode does not have the highest
modal gain as we had expected. In fact, the fundamental supermode has one of
the lowest modal gains of all the modes! Furthermore, when we examine the phase
plots for the y = 2 supermode (in Figure 4.10d), we see that the phase difference
between adjacent channels is approximately m radians, which implies that the so-
called vy = 2 supermode is actually the “highest order antisymmetric” supermode.
Figure 4.10 shows that the supermodes in complicated gain guided structures can
no longer be characterized simply by means of ranking them in order of decreasing
effective index.
the v = 2 high gain supermode has the undesirable twin lobed farfield pattern,
so we have not yet achieved our goal. When we examine the intensity nearfield
patterns of Figure 4.10, we see why this supermode has the highest modal gain of
all the supermodes: once again, the lossy interchannel regions favor the supermode
which has nulls in the interchannel regions.
relatively wider channels, while the vy = 1 fundamental mode is localized under
the narrower channels. This result is also completely unexpected. The reasons for
a do T T T i if T
| Wall 40 .
Trt | 4 v=2@)
1-200cm =
7 3+
(B) — NEARFIELD FARFIELD & OF t
Zz
s -40- > 4
vy =| 4 +
< |
oO +
OS -80+ + +
= + 4
ta +
& -120b + -
v2 | +
1 It 1 i l i
Seer
i i 1 H L 1
aaa -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
-200 204060 -5 oO 5 LATERAL DIMENSION
LATERAL FARFIELD (pm)
DIMENSION ANGLE
(um) (degrees )
with widths between 8um and 4m, and separated by 5um. (a) gain profile (b) intensity nearfield
and farfield patterns (c) modal diagram (d) phase plots for the y = 1 and v = 2 supermodes. Note
that the farfield patterns are no longer symmetric about 0°.
clearly show the limitations of the theory of §3.4.
guides: unlike the symmetric real index guided waveguides of Figures 2.11 and 4.1,
the symmetric gain-induced waveguides of Figures 2.12 and 4.6 and the asymmet-
ric real index waveguide of Figure 4.2 for which all the higher order modes have
symmetric farfield patterns, the farfield patterns of this asymmetric gain-induced
waveguide are asymmetric about 0°. Asymmetric gain induced waveguides are a
unique class of waveguide because of the complex nature of the electric field due
to gain guiding and the lack of left-right inversion symmetry of the waveguide. We
will explore this point further in §5.12.
intensity over approximately one half the array, thus indicating that although gain
guiding has reduced the effective phase mismatch between the channels, there is
still too large a degree of phase and gain mismatch present. Although the mismatch
between the channels could be reduced by decreasing the variations in the widths
of the waveguides, as is pointed out in §4.2(a), there is a practical lower limit
on the the attainable photolithographic resolution which makes this difficult, and
especially so for proton isolated lasers. We therefore consider another method of
reducing the channel mismatch by increasing the interchannel gain. This is also
advantageous from the point of view of promoting phase locked operation of the
array.” Now, however, we see that there are at least two additional advantages
to be derived from an enhanced interchannel gain. Firstly, the phase and gain
mismatch between adjacent channels will be reduced (because the fields of the
isolated lasers will be less well-confined, and hence less sensitive to variations in
if we recall that the twin lobed antisymmetric supermode is favored over the
single lobed fundamental supermode because it has nulls in the lossy interchannel
regions, we might surmise that increasing the interchannel gain will tend to favor
the fundamental supermode more than it will the antisymmetric supermode.
of Figure 4.10 except that the interchannel gain has been increased from —200cm~1
to transparency (Ocm~}). When we examine the theoretical farfield patterns of
this waveguide, we immediately receive another surprise, this time rather pleasant:
whereas in all of the waveguides we have studied so far only the fundamental mode
has the desired single lobed farfield pattern, we now find many modes with single
lobed farfield patterns! Understanding how and why this come about will lead us
down some exceedingly interesting mathematical paths in the next chapter.
supermode, which is quite unlike the other supermodes plotted in Figure 4.11
because it alone has a twin lobed, nearly symmetrical, farfield pattern. The reason
that this mode is so different from the others may be best understood in the light
of §4.3(a), where we showed that due to the lossy unpumped GaAs active region
at the edges of the array, it is possible to consider a strongly coupled array (t.e.,
one with a large interchannel gain) as either an array perturbed by a box (“array
plus box” picture) or as a box waveguide perturbed by an array (“box plus array”
picture). In the case of a uniform array, we remarked that it was immaterial which
description is used, although the “array plus box” description is probably a little
better.
fe) 50 t T i i
L. 4
rt Poo cm! t y25
te 40F S) 4 3 214
(B) — NEARFIELD FARFIELD 5 3 4
Z 30h 4
° 6
vel 2 S
8 20+ |
in 8
1Or
© <
viz2 |
it i i i
—/NV 3.4146 7 8 9
—Re {n}—>
(D)
yv=3
0.0 Ty i
o -lOr- y=l ~|
Z = 4
v=4 8 -2.08}- 4
vd L- 4
IA ~ je es ee
lu
2 qT t v i
-29"t 4
v5 “
-4nr * _
1 J i 4 |
potty tui lL Ll -20 0 20 40 60
-40 0 40 BO -4-20 2 4 LATERAL DIMENSION
LATERAL FARFIELD wm
DIMENSION ANGLE
(ym) (degrees)
as Figure 4.10 but with the interchannel gain set to transparency (Ocm~+). (a) gain profile (b)
intensity nearfield and farfield patterns (c) modal diagram (d) phase plots for the y = landv =5
supermodes. Note that all the farfield patterns except that of the vy = 5 supermode are single
lobed.
permode. We note that the spatial frequency of the nearfield intensity distribution
for the vy = 1...4 box modes are non-resonant with that of the perturbation, while
the »y = 5 mode, having as many peaks as there are array elements, is resonant
with the array structure. In a manner entirely analogous to the uniform array
case of §4.3(a), this explains why the vy = 5 supermode has the highest modal
gain of all the waveguide modes. When we compare the strongly coupled uniform
array of Figure 4.7b with the strongly coupled asymmetric nonuniform array of
Figure 4.11, we see that the asymmetrical nature of the gain perturbation alters
the character of the nonresonant box modes by suppressing one of the twin lobes
of the farfield pattern. However, the asymmetric gain perturbation is incapable
changing the character in the resonant vy = 5 mode so that this mode has the usual
twin lobed farfield pattern. We therefore see that, unlike the strongly coupled uni-
form array of Figure 4.7b, which was better described as an array perturbed by
a box, the strongly coupled nonuniform gain guided array must be thought of
in terms of a box waveguide perturbed by the array. This will be true for any
strongly coupled gain guided array: whatever the array design, the interaction of
the array and box modes cannot be ignored.
discovery of a means of supressing one lobe of a twin lobed farfield pattern is an
(b) Chirped Arrays of Gain Guided Lasers: Experimental
our discussion of numerical techniques in §2.7 that it was important to find all
the modes of a waveguide, and especially so for the mode with the highest modal
gain (because that mode will be the lasing mode). Unfortunately, the automated
root finding routine in the MODES program described in §2.7 occasionally misses
roots of the dispersion equation (2.7.13), and in fact it first missed finding the
vy = 5 mode discussed above. It therefore seemed (erronously, as it turned out) as
if all the modes of the strongly coupled gain guided chirped array had the desired
single lobed farfield pattern, and so we therefore decided to fabricate a chirped
array of gain guided lasers.
form gain guided proton implanted chirped arrays in which the damage created
by the implanted protons creates the high resistivity regions that separate the
laser channels. Two channel configurations were used. In the first® (pattern A in
Figure 4.12a), the widths of the laser channels vary from 84m to 3 ym in steps of
H*-
ACM mplant Boum \
Baume ome Sumy | ae Sum Sam ia nes ee
o3ymt SS YS ISASS am
at -GaAs n* GaAs
chirped array.
the same as the first but allows enhanced interchannel coupling, the widths of
the laser channels vary from 84m to 5um in steps of 0.5um with 2.5um between
channels. The width of each laser array was approximately 60um.
(MBE) on a n*GaAs substrate (Si doped, 2 x 10!8cem~3). The composition and
thickness of the layers are as follows: n Gao.¢Alo,4As lower cladding layer (2.0um
thick), Si doped, 3 x 10!"em-3; undoped GaAs active region (0.15yum thick);
p GaogAlo4As upper cladding layer (1.8um thick), Be doped, 3 x 10!7cm~?;
p' GaAs cap layer, (0.2um thick), Be doped, 1 x 10!8em-3. Immediately after
growth a single contact of Cr/Au was deposited to form the p contact. Thick
photoresist was patterned to define the array, and protons were implanted to define
the laser channels. Various proton implant energies were used to demonstrate the
importance of strong interchannel coupling (t.e., gain) for achieving single lobed
farfield operation; dosages were typically 3 x 10!®em~3. After implantation, the
photoresist was removed, the devices were lapped to ~ 75um, AuGe/Au was
deposited to form the n contact, and the contacts were annealed at 380°C for 20
seconds in an Hz atmosphere. Devices were then cleaved into bars ~ 250um long
and tested under low duty cycle, pulsed conditions.
conveniently varied by changing the depth (energy) of the proton implantation; a
smaller implant energy increases the distance between the bottom of the insulating
proton damaged regions and the active layer. If the proton penetration depth
does not extend to the active layer, current will spread into the regions between
the laser channels, thus increasing the interchannel coupling (gain). For a given
value (shallow implant, maximum interchannel gain). The maximum interchannel
gain is determined by the envelope function for the spatial gain distribution.
(LPE) while later work’ utilized wafers grown by molecular beam epitaxy (MBE).
Better results were obtained with the MBE grown wafers; we attribute this to the
oOo
oo
wn
uJ
Ee
1.314
! i 1 | 1. L L i i L a l J L
-~30 -20 -!10 O 10 20 30 -30 -20 -10 O 10 20 30
FARFIELD ANGLE @ (degrees)
implanted chirped arrays. Note the importance of a high interchannel gain.
nel gain (Figure 4.12a, pattern A, deep implant of 160KeV, 0.5um spreading
Figure 4.13a and 4.13b, respectively. Notice that, as expected from the model
of Figure 4.10, the farfield pattern of the deeply implanted array is multilobed.
However, Figure 4.13b shows that the farfield pattern of the shallowly implanted,
strongly coupled array is a very narrow, single lobed beam.
for two shallowly proton implanted chirped arrays from the same wafer. Fig-
ure 4.14a demonstrates a single lobed, very narrow diffraction limited beam at
approximately 1.31;,, while Figure 4.14b demonstrates high power (450mW into
34° at 5.31;,) operation. Both beams are emitted at an angle of about 4° with
respect to the facet normal in the direction of the smaller stripes. At high power,
the single lobed beams broaden slightly, and some power starts to appear in a
sidelobe at —4°. These effects will be discussed in Chapter 5.
chirped array, we carefully rechecked the theoretical results of §4.4(a) by using
the CONTOUR program of §2.7 and discovered that we had missed the v = 5
mode which had the highest modal gain and a twin lobed farfield pattern! We were
now in the curious position of having developed a theory which predicted that our
array should not work — only to find that did!
twin lobed farfield pattern because it is “resonant” with the array perturbation,
~—
oO
~~
15
| j
x40 1.0 Lin x I. Th
-20 -I0 O 10 20 -20 -1I0 O 10 20
of a proton implanted chirped array with a high interchannel gain.
favored as long as there is less gain in the interchannel regions than there is in the
channel regions. The only parameter left in our model which might be changed is
the spatial gain envelope function. Up until now, we have assumed that the peak
gain in each laser was identical; the “gain tailoring” effect described in §4.4(a)
resulted from our use of the effective index method to analyze a two-dimensional
waveguide in terms of a simpler one-dimensional slab waveguide.
the laser channels share common contacts and are thus electrically connected in
parallel. The voltage drop across all the lasers is the same and hence, to a first
approximation, the current density flowing through each laser is also. It is known
that narrower proton implanted lasers have larger threshold current densities than
wider lasers. This effect has been described in terms of a “leakage current”® and
implies that, when the array is operated below threshold and for a given current
flowing through the entire device, the wider lasers will be closer to threshold than
the narrower ones. In other words, the gain will be greater under the wider stripes
an examination of the nearfield spontaneous emission pattern just below thresh-
old which makes visible the spatial gain profile across the array. Figure 4.15a
shows the spatial gain profile in the deeply implanted array of Figure 4.12a, while
Figure 4.15b does the same for the shallowly implanted array of Figure 4.12b.
The considerably greater light intensity under the wider stripes indicates that the
gain is greater there than it is under the narrower stripes, thus making visible the
nonuniform gain profile across the array.
evidenced by the large modulation of the spontaneous emission pattern which
results from the well isolated lasers, while the very strong interchannel gain of the
shallowly implanted laser in Figure 4.15b shows very little, if any, modulation in
H*-impiant
vo at -ampiant ; ; Spm i
Bum ome eum. eS Same UU a ean
Sica So meee ao meee ree araxcd PSs ee se 8S =
0.3 nia SYS WS: im
n*-GaAs n*-Gaas
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 SG 60 -20 -10 O [0 20 30 40 50 60
LATERAL DIMENSION (um)
strongly coupled proton implanted chirped arrays.
ling the spatial gain profile within a proton implanted laser array; such lasers
will be referred to as tatlored gain semiconductor lasers. Evidently, the effect of
gain tailoring in the strongly coupled chirped array is sufficient to overcome the
propensity to excite the twin lobed box modes, thus yielding the desired single
lobed farfield pattern of Figure 4.13b. This is a result of great importance, and
understanding the mechanism behind the suppression of the twin lobed farfield
(b) Tailored Gain Chirped Arrays: Theoretical
most important new parameter to be determined is the spatial gain gradient. This
parameter may be estimated by noting that the experimental results indicate that
light is emitted over the entire width of the array, which implies that the low gain
edge of the array is pumped at least to transparency. The value of the gain at the
high gain edge of the array is then fixed by the requirement that the modal gain
of the lasing mode be equal to the mirror losses.(81-5) The only other parameter
needed is the value of the gain in the interchannel region. This is not an easy
parameter to estimate either experimentally or theoretically; however, we will see
that of the three it is the least important because we will want it to be as large as
possible.
among them a decrease in the phase mismatch parameter($4-4(2)) and an improve-
ment in the phase locking characteristics of the array.» We now add one more.’
Since the farfield pattern of the array is given by the Fourier transform of the
device’s nearfield pattern, and the power radiated into the central lobe is propor-
tional to the Fourier coefficient with zero spatial frequency (t.e., the DC term), it is
clearly desirable to make the nearfield pattern of the array as uniform as possible.
This may also be achieved by strongly coupling the array elements. This second
point is illustrated in the theoretical waveguide models of Figure 4.16, which are
used to predict the theoretical intensity nearfield and farfield patterns of the lasing
supermode in a tailored gain chirped array 60um wide. Figure 4.16a models an
array with small interchannel gain, and Figure 4.16b an array with large inter-
INTENSITY INTENSITY
tt
(cm!)
-200
80 60 40 20 0 -20 io -5 O 5 -10
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE
(2 m) @ (degrees)
(a) weakly and (b) strongly coupled tailored gain chirped array with the antiguiding parameter
b = 3. (c) shows the same mode for a truly tailored gain broad area laser in which there is no
trace of the array structure. Note that increasing the interchannel gain decreases the amount of
power radiated into the sidelobes, with the natural limit of this process being the tailored gain
shown schematically in Figure 4.12b.
variation in the real part of the spatial index of refraction. In actual devices,
however, there is an approximately linear relationship between the value of the
gain at any point in the laser and a depression in the real part of the index of
refraction profile; this effect is known as the antiguiding effect.(81-5) It is usually
assumed that this ratio, referred to as the antiguiding factor 6, is a constant which
is approximately equal to three. (An experimental determination of this ratio will
be made in §5.13, where we find b = 2.5+ 0.5.) Including the antiguiding factor
does not appreciably change the results of this chapter. However, since we are
now attempting to make a simple model for a working device, we will henceforth
incorporate this parameter into our waveguide models.
spatial modulation of the nearfield pattern, with the result that the farfield pat-
tern becomes increasingly single lobed. Figure 4.16a shows that a tailored gain
chirped array with small interchannel gain (well defined individual laser channels)
will not have a single lobed farfield pattern. On the other hand, Figure 4.16b
illustrates that a device with large interchannel coupling will have a single lobed
farfield pattern 1.5° wide. The experimental single lobed diffraction pattern for
the shallowly implanted chirped array of Figure 4.13b is thus diffraction limited.
the interchannel gain has been made so strong that all traces of the array — and
the sidelobe — have disappeared. Obviously, since the gain tailoring effect in a
proton implanted laser depends upon chirping the widths of the array elements,
in Chapter 5.
chirped array of Figure 4.16b are shown in Figure 4.17. Unlike all the other
waveguides we have previously encountered, the farfield patterns of all the modes
of this waveguide are single lobed. It therefore no longer matters whether or not
the “fundamental” mode has the highest modal gain. This point will be further
discussed in Chapter 5.
strongly localized towards the high gain side of the array and a very wide farfield
pattern much closer to 0° than that of the other modes. Despite the fact that this
mode has the highest modal gain, experimental farfield patterns corresponding
to this mode have not been observed. We suggest three reasons for this. First,
the narrow mode width causes this mode to saturate rapidly, thereby reducing
its saturated modal gain relative to that of the other modes. Second, the vy = 1
mode does not utilize the gain medium as effectively as the broader high gain
vy = 3 mode does and as a result it will contribute less power to the output beam.
Finally, there can be no step discontinuity in the spatial gain profile in an actual
device. The model of Figure 4.17a therefore is not a good one for that mode.
We therefore refer to the vy = 3 mode as the “principal” lasing mode and will
henceforth ignore the vy = 1 mode.
mode discrimination between the the fundamental and the higher order modes
is less than lcm™!, in the shallowly implanted tailored gain chirped array the
(um)
rt [LP 4 T T T T
~ !
-200 em"! 'g 40 vi
3.415 & ve3
" Lo | 30h ©
> 4
3.414 =
NE ARFIELD FARFIELD Oo 20+ + "+
2 + 42 =
S) 10 + 4
= +
vezi +
+>
2 a ee Lg
l 3.4] 5 20 25 30 35 40
—Re{n}—»
(D)
a) 2
5 T T eniva
lu
wnvyz4 Pat oO
DIMENSION ANGLE
(42m) degrees)
Figure 4.16b (a) waveguide model with the antiguiding factor 6 = 3, (b) nearfield and farfield
patterns, (c) modal plot, and (d) phase variations for the nearfield patterns. Note that all modes
coupled tailored gain array will lase in predominantly one supermode.
tilted with respect to the waveguide axis. This leads to the off-axis beam emission
the tailored gain chirped array of Figure 4.17a is much less than that of the uniform
array of Figure 4.6, thus implying a possibly less astigmatic output beam. This
comes about because less power flows from the high gain channel regions into the
low gain interchannel regions of a strongly coupled array than in a weakly coupled
device with a lossy interchannel region.
strongly coupled tailored gain chirped array have single lobed farfield patterns
only slightly displaced from that of the fundamental. This is a direct result of
the complex nature of the electric field and the lack of left-right symmetry in
the asymmetric structure of Figure 4.17a and will be extensively discussed in
Chapter 5. From a practical point of view, however, this is an important result
because when the array is operated well above threshold, gain saturation will
cause higher order modes to lase. In any symmetric waveguide, or any real index
to rapid degradation of the farfield pattern. In a strongly coupled tailored gain
chirped array, however, the farfield pattern of the higher order modes are all single
lobed and only slightly displaced from the fundamental, so that when these modes
lase the effect will be to merely broaden the beam slightly and cause a small shift
causing the optical field to spread out over a larger volume, thereby potentially
increasing the power output and decreasing the beamwidth; (84-4(¢))
twin lobed farfield pattern;(84-4(a))
array. (845(2)) In fact, as the experimental multilobed farfield pattern of the
deeply implanted array with small interchannel gain of Figure 4.13 shows,
a high interchannel gain is cructal to achieving single lobed operation in a
tailored gain chirped array.
of the output beam. (84-5(8))
coupled array fails, the two halves of the array are effectively decoupled, and
will be unlikely to operate in a phase locked mode. This problem is reduced in
a strongly coupled array because there will be coupling between second nearest
gain broad area laser than as an array. We will extensively explore this topic in
the next chapter.
lized the proton implanted chirped array structure to provide gain tailoring, and
achieved large interchannel gains by the simple expedient of a shallow proton im-
plantation so that current spreading in the upper cladding layer created gain in
the active layer between the array elements. Welch and Scifres have also used
proton implanted chirped arrays to provide gain tailoring, but they achieved the
necessary high interchannel gain by means of an offset stripe structure that effec-
tively creates gain in the interchannel region. A schematic view of their device is
shown in Figure 4.18aéb, which is reproduced from their work.
when the length of the center section of the laser was equal to the length of the two
offset. end sections.!° Thus, there is effectively no distinction between the channel
and interchannel regions because the total integrated gain along the length of the
laser is (approximately) the same in the center channel regions as it is in the
interchannel regions. This indicates that their device also resembles a tazlored
gain broad area laser more than it does an array of individual lasers, providing
independent confirmation of our own work. Figure 4.18c demonstrates that the
published description of their device as an “array” is actually a misnomer. Like
our own version, it is more properly referred to as a tailored gain broad area laser
and not as an array. We remark in passing that we can see no advantage to the
offset stripe version of the proton implanted chirped array over our own shallowly
Alg.4GaggAs (p TYPE
LIGHTOUT acer
CUaZIZiZiZiZ
} HUA AB AA
4 AVA %
g A Oo
HUE Z y y Z Z (4 PROTON IMPLANT
HHA AGE
y AIA Whe
é , ASYMMETRIC
Z OFFSET STRIPE
A PATTERN
PHA SME ie aN
VIPLCEAUEUO
GaAs SUBSTRATE
center longer
| oe ee |
T T | rT
€ both equal
FS
£ oe
rr ee
center shorter
|e res es ee
5 © 5 0 5 W
stripe pattern of proton implantation (b) side view showing chirped structure (c) experimental
farfield patterns. When the length of the center section equals the length of the two end sections,
there is effectively no distinction between the channel and interchannel regions, making the device
resemble a broad area laser more than an array.
laser array is to meet three criteria: (1) the fundamental supermode must be
spatially segregated from the other supermodes (e.g., by chirping the widths of
the lasers); (2) the gain profile must be tailored so as to favor the fundamental
supermode (e.g., in a proton implanted chirped array); and (3) the interchannel
coupling must be sufficiently increased so as to bring about single lobed operation
(e.g., by shallow proton implantation in a tailored gain chirped array — really a
man’s complex problems are of his own devising.
lasers with uniform spatial gain profiles and widths greater than ~ 10um have
very wide, poorly characterized, and unstable farfield patterns many times the
diffraction limit. These undesirable farfield patterns result from the poor mode
discrimination between the fundamental and higher order lateral modes, and the
presence of uncontrolled filamentation.(81-2(a))
place many individual lasers in close proximity to form a phase locked laser
array. (§1-2(c)) Although the filamentation problem has been suppressed in an ar-
ray, the lateral mode problem remains. The well-known undesirable twin lobed
farfield pattern of a uniformly spaced array of identical lasers (Figure 1.6) comes
about because the lossy interchannel regions in the uniform array cause the highest
order supermode to have the highest modal gain, and this mode has a twin lobed
farfield pattern, (84-1) In principle, fundamental mode operation in an array could
be achieved by chirping the widths of the array elements so that the fundamental
the desired fundamental mode, the fundamental mode will be the preferred lasing
mode at threshold, and the desired single lobed farfield pattern will be obtained.
pendence of the variation in the real part of the refractive index, and the modal
gains are then determined by the overlap between the electric field and the spa-
tial gain distribution. In Chapter 4, we explored the idea of a real index guided
chirped array which achieves fundamental mode operation by spatially segregating
the fundamental from the higher order modes, (84.2) Unfortunately, the fundamen-
tal and technological limitations of the real index guided chirped array structure
make this structure very difficult, if not impossible, to fabricate, (84-2(2)) However,
by taking advantage of the fact that in a gain guided laser the spatial gain pro-
file determines both the electric field as well the modal gain, we demonstrated a
single contact tailored gain array of semiconductor lasers in which gain tailoring
was achieved by chirping the widths of the proton implanted laser elements com-
prising the array. (34-4(6)) Subsequently, we showed that the desired single lobed
farfield patterns could best be obtained in devices in which the interchannel gain
had been made so strong that the distinction between an array and a broad area
gain tailoring, while the shallow proton implantation provided a large interchannel
gain.
structure gave the improved results. In §5.2 we will demonstrate the “halftone
process” of achieving gain tailoring which does not use an array geometry. The
such tailored gain broad area lasers 404m wide.
by either tailored gain proton implanted chirped arrays or in tailored gain broad
area lasers plays an important role in the suppression of the lateral mode control
problem in these devices. It may also possibly contribute to the suppression of the
filamentation problem as well. In this thesis, however, we restrict our attention
primarily to the analytic study of the (unsaturated) optical eigenmodes of a linear
asymmetric tailored gain waveguide, leaving the complicated subject of the above
threshold behavior (e.g., filamentation problem) of these devices for further study.
Analysis introduced in §2.6(c), first considering the somewhat simpler case of a real
index guided waveguide with a linear variation of the refractive index in §5.3. How-
ever, it is for the complex asymmetric tailored gain waveguides that the technique
of Path Analysis proves its elegance and power. We will find that by following the
path of the argument of the optical eigenfunction (in this case the Airy function)
throughout the complex plane, (85-8) we will be able to determine all the important
properties of asymmetric tailored gain laser waveguides. In particular, we are able
to give simple closed form expressions for the eigenvalues, mode discriminations
(§5.9), nearfield patterns (§5.10), and farfield patterns (§5.11) using fairly simple
algebraic and geometric arguments.
properties that make it very different from either real index guided or symmetric
waveguides, thus making them especially interesting from both a theoretical and
a practical point of view. Unlike all real index guided lasers or symmetric gain
tailored gain lasers do not have nulls in their intensity nearfield patterns(§5.10),
and as a result also have farfield patterns that are all single lobed and only slightly
displaced from the fundamental (§5.11). Thus, when gain saturation at high power
operation causes several lateral modes to lase, the farfield pattern remains single
lobed, albeit with a slightly larger beamwidth. These unusual properties come
about as a result of the Stokes phenomenon,! which plays a prominent role in the
theory of the asymptotic approximations of complex valued functions. In §5.12
we discuss some general Fourier Transform relationships which relate a device’s
geometry to its farfield pattern.
tiguiding parameter,” and in §5.13 we are able to make use of asymmetric halftone
tailored gain lasers with varying spatial gain gradients to make a measurement of
this important parameter.
patterns, and touch upon some design criteria and engineering tradeoffs for prac-
current into the GaAs crystal is either fully injected (into the p' GaAs cap layer)
or completely blocked (by the proton implantation); there is no simple way to
achieve intermediate values of injected current. In §4.5(a) we discovered that gain
tailoring could be achieved in a proton implanted chirped array by making use
of the “leakage current” effect, but that the desired single lobed farfield patterns
inadequate for explaining the gain tailoring effect when the implant depth is very
small.
of the gain using contacts that either fully inject or completely block current flow
is conceptually identical to the problem that the graphics artist faces when he
(or she) desires to print a photograph with many shades of grey in a newspaper
using black ink on white paper. We therefore consider solving our problem the
same way graphics artists solve theirs: by means of a halftone pattern. A halftone
pattern such as that of Figure 5.1 achieves the illusion of grey tones by varying
the fractional surface coverage of black ink to white paper over the newspaper’s
to create the “halftone” laser of Figure 5.2 and Figure 5.3.
be smeared out so that the illusion of a uniformly varying grey scale is created.
shades of grey.
chirped array. Another way of thinking about this structure would be to real-
ize that for a very shallow proton implantation depth it is the fractional surface
coverage of injecting to noninjecting contact that varies over the surface of the
chirped array. For example, in the strongly coupled array of Figure 4.12b the
fractional surface coverage of injecting contact varies from acre ~~ 80% on the left
to sees s~ 70% on the right. This is very similar to the idea of a halftone pattern,
but unfortunately the thick photoresist required to block the protons limits the
usefulness of this method to very simple patterns such as those of Figure 4.12.
utilizing a halftone pattern in conjunction with Schottky isolation that has been
described in §2.2(e). The practical difficulty with this method lies in obtaining
the desired pattern of dots. Linearly graded halftone may be readily obtained at
any artist’s supply store for only a few dollars. A typical pattern is illustrated in
Figure 5.1. The photolithographic mask used to create the microscopic halftone
pattern on the surface of the wafer was made by photoreducing the graded halftone
screen of Figure 5.1 by 250x.
halftone method for achieving gain tailoring? is shown in Figure 5.2a. The stan-
dard four layer heterostructure was grown by molecular beam epitaxy (MBE). The
thickness of the upper cladding layer has been increased to enhance lateral carrier
diffusion in the region between the ptGaAs cap layer and the active layer. The
layers were grown on an n* GaAs substrate (Si doped, 2x 10!8cm~1). The compo-
LASER
Cr/Au
ooo
oes
eee
pees :
eeses Active
@eeeos
SSeae Region
@eeses
@esener
Seeees
@eees
@eeeves
OOeeer
Seeees
Oeeres
@eeoee
@eoee
o+- eeoee
maximum
Cm
oe
ees
euone
eevee
eoeeeve
eeees
#enee
meee een
eonvene
waveguide model showing nonuniform spatial gain profile, and (c) top view of a halftone laser
showing direction of output beam. The black dots on the surface of the laser represent injecting
p*GaAs while the white areas represent noninjecting GaAlAs. The varying fractional surface
coverage of injecting to noninjecting contact creates a controlled nonuniform spatial gain profile
ple quantum well (MQW) of 200 Angstroms of GaAs separated by 200 Angstroms
of Gag.7Alo.3As; p Gao,7Alo.3As upper cladding layer 3.0um thick, Be doped,
3 x 10!"cm7!; p+GaAs cap layer, 0.2um thick, Be doped, 1 x 10!8cm7!.
pGao,7Alo.3As forms a Schottky blocking contact. The black areas of the pattern
block the etch, leaving the injecting ptGaAs cap layer, while the white areas on
the mask allow the etch to remove the cap layer, leaving the pGag 7 Alo. 3As block-
ing contact. The current injection density (and hence gain) thus decreases from
left to right with the decrease of fractional coverage by p*GaAs. The enhanced
lateral carrier diffusion provided by the thick upper cladding layer smears out the
effects of the discrete dots and makes for a smooth, nonuniform spatial gain dis-
tribution within the active layer. Since the dot size varies linearly across the laser,
to a first approximation the gain profile varies linearly as well. Thus, halftone
tailored gain lasers provide a well-characterized means of experimentally studying
strongly asymmetric linear tailored gain waveguides.
in the spatial gain profile, the same idea may be easily extended to create nearly
arbitrary two-dimensional spatial gain distributions within a broad area laser,
offering an entirely new degree of freedom to the designer of semiconductor lasers.
In such halftone tailored gain lasers, the nature of the halftone pattern, combined
with the enhanced current spreading in the upper cladding layer, removes all traces
surface of the laser.
profile for the halftone tailored gain broad area laser of Figure 5.2a. Figure 5.2c
shows a top view of the laser of Figure 5.2a, and schematically illustrates how the
output beams are directed at an angle © to the mirror facets in the direction of
the low gain side of the laser. As will be shown in §5.11, this is a direct result of
the asymmetric spatial gain profile.
metric halftone laser are shown in Figure 5.3. This figure demonstrates that linear
asymmetric tailored gain halftone broad area lasers are capable of nearly diffraction
limited high power (~ 200mW into 24°) single lobed farfield operation. Note also
that the farfield patterns are strongly asymmetric (the beam is emitted about 4°
off-axis), and that the beamwidth increases gradually at high power. The reasons
for this behavior will be discussed below.
either lateral modes, filamentation, or both. The detailed experimental resolution
of this question (by very careful measurements of the spectrally resolved nearfield
=~ -100 |
G -200
3.2 Ith
[Ne \xs 2.1 +t Lt Teh
iT H it I l iT i | l ] l
-I0 O 10 20 30 40 -30 -15 0 15 30
LATERAL DIMENSION( um) FARFIELD ANGLE @
spontaneous emission pattern at 0.7 J;y.
3.415
L + 3.415 -
n Te
' . 43.400 _ vel
(B) 3.410F
NEARFIELD FARFIELD 4 2
e = +
| 3.406 3
yl
3.402-
3.400
WY)
=| 2] S/S/>
“10-5 O § 10 1520-30-20 +10 O 10 20 30
pm) (degrees)
profile (b) intensity nearfield and farfield patterns (c) mode pattern.
Ne —o
where ne is the (constant) index of refraction external to the waveguide, no is the
index of refraction at z = 0+, and o is the gradient of the index of refraction
profile within the core region of the waveguide.
After substituting Equation (5.3.1) into Equation (2.5.4) and dropping the
gat +t k2((n2 — n?) — 2nokgox) E = 0 (5.3.2)
E(x) = a Ai(€é) + bBi(€) E=pt+wr (5.3.3)
=—(n*-n
p= Galt ~ no) (5.3.4)
w = ko(2ngo)3
The secular equation yielding the eigenvalue condition may be found by match-
Jp Ai(o) — Ail(p) — \/p,Ai(p + we) + Ai'(p + wé) ( )
where
ke 2 2
= — . 5.3.6
Pe we (n ne) ( )
the tailored real index ramp waveguide shown in Figure 5.4a. Notice that, like the
real index and box waveguides of Figure 2.11 and 2.12, the higher order modes of
gradually shifts from the high index side of the waveguide to the low index side.
This is similar to the real index guided chirped array of Figure 4.2, and may be
understood by using the method of Path Analysis(82-6(¢)) to follow the path of the
of the functions Ai(é) or Bi(é) dominates the contribution to E(z) in Equa-
tion (5.3.3). (If both were equally important, it would not be possible to analyze
the waveguide in terms of any simple function, and the analysis would have to
be carried out numerically.) Figure 5.5 plots Ai(é) (solid line) and Bi(é) (dashed
line), showing that along the negative real ¢ axis as £ —» —oo, both functions
are sinusoidal with a gradually decreasing period and amplitude, while along the
positive real axis Ai(€) decays exponentially and Bi(é) grows exponentially.
Since E(z) must match to a decaying exponential outside the waveguide, the func-
tion Bi(é) will not satisfy the boundary conditions and hence will not contribute
appreciably to E(x). (This point will be discussed in detail when we discuss the
asymmetric linear tailored gain waveguide in §5.8.) We can therefore approximate
_ fr V2(-@)-M4 sin[2(-€)2 + 4] € <0 (5.4.1)
LU 2e-1/4_-$e°? g>0
-14 -l2 -i0 -8 -6 -4 ~-2 O 2
boundary conditions because it grows exponentially as + — oo.
ciated with a zero of the sine or cosine function, the parity condition determining
which function to associate with each mode. In the case of the linear tailored index
waveguide however, the boundary conditions require that all of the well-confined
modes be determined by the Airy function Ai(é). Each mode is then associated
with a zero —r,y, of Ai(€).
confined mode the path £ of the argument of the Airy function € = p+wz
rth
Equation (2.6.5). Note that while |k| (and hence the length of L for the box guide)
depends on the eigenvalue 7, for the case of the linear guide |w| is independent of
n: the eigenvalue dependence of the argument to the Airy function is contained
entirely in p. Thus, unlike the argument kz for the box waveguide, (82-6(c)) for the
various modes of the real ramp waveguide the line £ translates along the real axis
modes of the tailored real index ramp waveguide is shown by the heavy horizontal line. Compare
with the corresponding Figure 2.14 for the real index box waveguide.
€ axis (heavy solid line), and the mode shape (medium solid line) for the first
three modes of a real ramp waveguide. It is of particular interest to note that
the optical power of the fundamental mode is located to the far left of the guide
(at c = 0 and € = p) due to the exponential tail of Ai(f) when € = p+wé> 0,
while the peak intensity for the higher order modes gradually moves to the other
side of the waveguide due to the (—¢)1/4 amplitude dependence in the sinusoidal
approximation of Ai(é) in Equation (5.4.1).
off condition for a mode. A guided mode given by Ai(p + wz) must match to a
decaying exponential at z = @, and this can occur only if the rightmost endpoint
of £ (€ = p+ w) lies to the right of the first zero of the derivative of Ai(€) at
€ = —1.02. The condition for the v** mode to be guided is thus |wé|+ 1.02 < —ry.
This condition is approximate because our assumption that one end of CL starts at
a zero of the Airy function is only satisfied for a well-confined mode, and this is
solutions of the Helmholtz equation (5.3.2) are once again linear combinations of
the Airy functions, but now with a compler argument. For convenience, we split
ne and no into their real and imaginary parts:
no = No — 1D'9/2ko ’
imaginary in a gain guided laser in which antiguiding has been ignored, and be-
comes complex when either intentionally introduced real index guiding is present
or in a gain guided structure in which the effects of antiguiding are included. It is
index of refraction due to the presence of gain through the free carrier and band
edge effects. The antiguiding parameter b (sometimes referred to by R) has been
assigned values in the literature? between 2 and 6. In (85-13) we experimentally
measure b = 2.5. The real constant s is related to the guide parameters by
in the index of refraction n(z) at the left edge of the guide z = 0, while there will
be a corresponding step discontinuity at the right edge of the guide x = 2 only
if ne # Np = No — okol. The effect of the discontinuity in n(x) at the right edge
of the guide depends upon the magnitude of the discontinuity and also upon the
particular eigenmode as well as the width @ of the guide. Of course, in an actual
device there can be no real discontinunity in the spatial gain profile. However, since
it is only the value of the gradtent which is important, to first order at least, the
discrepancy between the model waveguide and an actual device may be ignored.
where a and b are complex constants, and
w ° (5.5.5)
Recall that(§5-4) the equation z = p+ wz describes a straight line £ in the
Re{o}
For the case of index guiding with no gain, ~ is zero. For the case of gain guiding,
with no index antiguiding (6 = 0), o may be written as an imaginary number is
with s real:
w = ko(2ngs)3(—i)3 . (5.5.7)
to three distinct families of modes, which will be referred to as the (+) , (0) , and
(—) branches. Since fig < fig, w is determined almost entirely by the cube root of
—1t which takes the values en /6 e157/6 and et?"/2_ The angle ~ then takes on
the values +30°, and +90°. The inclusion of index antiguiding (b 4 0) effects a
§5.6 Dispersion Equation and Eigenvalue Branch Structure
Since the quantity w/ is now a complex quantity, £ is no longer restricted to the
real axis. To determine its origin, the eigenvalue 7 is required. The normalized
eigenmodes will then be completely specified when the ratio of coefficients a/o is
known. Both of these quantities are determined by the boundary conditions which
require EF and dE /dz to be continuous at the edges of the guide and bounded at
infinity. If we require the field to decay exponentially as z + —oo and match the
boundary conditions at the left edge of the guide, we may derive an expression for
biz=0 Jp, Ai(o) — Ai'(p) ~~
where the prime (‘) denotes a derivative with respect to x, and
_ iia 42
Pe = —a (n-ne). (5.6.2)
Similar consideration at the right side of the guide leads to
Bi(p + wé) + Bi'(p + we
Inside the guide, the ratios (a/b)|,_) and (a/b)|,~, both describe the same linear
combination of Ai(z) and Bi(z). Setting them equal yields the eigenvalue equation
for n Equation (5.3.5). This technique for determining the secular equation is
reminiscent of the method by which the eigenvalue condition is derived in the
WKB method.®
Equation (5.3.5) may be solved numerically for the eigenvalues 7. The electric
fields may then be determined using Equation (5.6.1)and (5.5.4). For comparison
- 340 em-! ' 40 T T T T T
rT —~ zs
! L _| N—— 4-200 em™! - ob vei J
(B) NEARFIELD FARFIELD ~<
~ =40F 2 4
z +© -~goL 3 -
= -_
vel a
a ?
J) S -0ok , * 4
iw 3
oO —I60F 4
a.
/\ | 1 1 l J L
bee i 1 r 1 4 i
-40-20 0 20 40 60 80100-6 -4 -2
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELOD ANGLE
et
intensity nearfield and farfield patterns (c) modal plot. Note that all the nearfield patterns are
null-less and that the farfield patterns are all single lobed (cf. Figures 2.12and 5.4.
Only the first five modes with the highest 7 are shown. It is interesting to note
that while there is very little difference between real index and gain guided box
waveguides (Figure 2.11 and 2.12, respectively), comparison of Figure 5.7 with
that of the corresponding one for the real index waveguide of Figure 5.4 reveals a
striking difference between the two ramp waveguides. The higher order modes of
the real index waveguides have nulls in their nearfield patterns, while the tailored
gain guide modes do not. For real index waveguides, all higher order modes have
multilobed farfield patterns, but the farfield patterns of the tailored gain waveguide
have stngle lobed farfield patterns.
patterns and farfield patterns in terms of elementary functions, it is necessary to
eliminate either Ai or Bi from Equation (5.5.4).
damped sinusoidal function with a gradually decreasing period, while along the
positive real axis Ai(€) decays exponentially without oscillations or zeros. Simi-
larly, along the negative real axis, Bi(é) resembles a damped cosinusoidal function
with a gradually decreasing period, while along the positive real axis Bi(é) grows
exponentially without oscillations or zeros. However, as gain is introduced into
the waveguide, the mode paths deviate from the real axis and the eigenmodes of
this complex waveguide are determined by the analytic continuations of Ai(é) and
functions which are valid throughout the complex plane. These approximations
will be seen to greatly facilitate the analytic treatment of linear tailored gain
Lqg1/2_-1/4e-329?? |Lzl Bi(z) ~ mo 2(— aut cos[3(—z)? + 4] R
plex plane in Figure 5.8. Even though the approximations (5.7.1) and (5.7.2) are
strictly valid only as |z| + co, we have found them (numerically) to be fairly ac-
curate even for |z| as small as 2 or 3. We see that Ai(z) has zeros only along the
negative real axis, grows exponentially as |z| —> oo in the sectors | < |Zz| < 7,
and decays exponentially as |z| — oo in the sector |/z| < . Bi(z) also has zeros
along the negative real axis (but at different locations than those of Ai(z)), as well
as along the lines /z = +4. Otherwise, Bi(z) grows exponentially everywhere as
|z2| + oo. Unlike Ai(z), there is no sector in which Bi(z) decays exponentially as
ZOO.
Stokes regions;'the negative real axis and the lines Zz = +4 are the Stokes lines.
The Stokes regions play a crucial role in the analysis of asymmetric linear tailored
iC)
—Re{z}— —Re{z}—>+
10 tt
= odd
; W
— a J —4
Ee v4 | 4 L
| -2- - -24 7
4 5 Lo 4 L
-4- 0 be 444 =
-64 ~ -64 —
“e! LLB al '
4 L 4 Z
~i0 T Lan 2 v ¥ T T T t ¥ T F T T qT ¥ + F 4 al®) E t r 4 if 2 r 0 t 2 T T 1 1 qT q t
“10 -8 6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 10-8 -6 4 6 68 10
—Re{z}— "ne (}—
and (b) Bi(z); the arrows show the direction of increasing magnitude. Lines of constant phase for
(c) Ai(z) and (d) Bi(z); the arrows show the direction of increasing phase. The contours in (a) &
(b) differ by a factor of ten and by 7/4 in (c) & (d).
§5.8 Path Analysis for the Linear Tailored Gain Waveguide
mine which one of the terms a Ai(z) or b Bi(z) provides the dominant contribution
to E in Equation (5.5.4). We therefore examine both the ratio a/b as well as
|Ai(z)| / |Bi(z)| for modes on the (+) branch. Since the modes on the (—) branch
are cut off due to the relatively small width of the waveguide of Figure 5.7, we will
= +100 ° +I. =+60 cm!
oO oO
~~ e)
< TI, -60 cm”!
© <——| 20 p.m
-200 +, =-200 cm”!
this chapter.
(+)
value as high as 10)”, suggesting that the contribution of Ai(z) to E completely
= 108+ “
S y=3
| lost |
0 20 40 60 #80 ele) 120
Lh mT
different widths. To an excellent degree of approximation, the mode is determined almost entirely
by the behavior of Ai(z).
functions Ai(z) and Bi(z) are of the same order. Consequently, we must examine
the paths £ of the argument p+wz. The various paths taken by £ for each branch
are shown superimposed on |Ai(z)| in Figure 5.11. One endpoint z = p (x = 0)
lies near a zero of Ai(z) and the other is in the sector |/z| < } where |Ai(z)| is
exponentially small. This merely expresses the fact that the modes of the wide
\O ‘
(a) (+) & (—) branches, (b) (0) branch.
large, so that its magnitude at z = p+wé is much larger than it is at z = p.
Consequently, its profile is not consistent with a well-confined mode. This explains
why the ratio a/b above is so large for the (+) modes. As the guide width £
is increased, the endpoint z = p + wé penetrates deeper into the Stokes region
|Zz| < } and the increasing ratio a/b reflects the growing dissimilarity between
Ai(z) and Bi(z). Only when the endpoint z = p + wé lies near the Stokes line at
|4z\is = $ does Bi(z) make a significant contribution to the eigenmode. Thus the
solution ES) (2) of the Helmholtz equation can be expressed as a single term for
guides wider than some critical width 2*, to be determined in §5.10.
to a level line of Ai(z). For modes on the (+) branch this point lies near the
high gain side of the waveguide near z = 0, and so these modes have modal gains
mode at threshold. As is evident from Figure 5.7, it also has the highest effective
index of any mode on the (+) branch and will henceforth be referred to as the
“fundamental” mode of the waveguide.
paths £(—) with » = +30° are also illustrated in Figure 5.11 and are similar to
L(+) except that now the zero of the Airy function occurs at z= p+wé. Asa
consequence, these modes are concentrated in the lossy regions of the waveguide.
in Figure 5.11b with ~ = +90°. Unlike the previous two cases, Bi(z) plays a
much more prominent role on the (0) branch because the lines £(0) are nearly
symmetric about the real axis, and Ai(z) grows exponentially towards the Stokes
lines at Lz = +3 while Bi(z) decays. Since the electric field at the interface must
match to a decaying exponential that is bounded at infinity, Bi(z) better satisfies
the boundary conditions on the (0) branch than Ai({z) does, and hence plays a
much more important. role in determining E. Due to the symmetry of Bi(z) about
the positive real axis, the nearfield patterns of these modes are approximately
centered within the waveguide. These modes therefore have a modal gain which is
between modes on the (+) branch and modes on the (—) branch. They correspond
to the (0) branch of Figure 5.11. We remark that this description of modes on the
(0) branch holds for the wide waveguides considered here but becomes considerably
§5.9 Analytical Approximations for the Eigenvalues
to Bi(z) on the principal (+) branch, it becomes possible to derive very simple
analytical expressions for the mode effective indices and modal gains by recalling
that £ for the principal branch starts near a zero of Ai(z) and ends in the sector
of exponential decay. At the left edge of the guide E(0) = aAi(p), where p is given
by Equation (5.3.4). Setting equal to one of the (real) zeros —r, of the Airy
function
r= py = Bink — m2) (6.9.1)
and approximating (n2 — nz) by 2no(nv — no) yields an expression for the v*?
a F (--2) *| v=1,2,3.... (5.9.3)
with no index antiguiding (o = —ts), taking the principal (+) branch of w, and
equating the real and imaginary parts we obtain an expression for n = 7 +17 on
(5.9.4)
=(+) ~¢, V3
Np =no + €p
where
se ie
2ng
(fio , 79) and making an angle tan—!,/3 = 60° with the real axis. The modes are
spaced along this line according to the zeros of the Airy function, with the higher
at) = To _ 2ko->-&v
— Ty
and 0 < rj < rg..., we see that the fundamental mode has the highest modal gain
of the fundamental mode must equal the mirror losses —I’,, (scattering losses are
probably insignificant in a wide gain guided laser). Equation (5.9.6) may thus be
inverted to give the required peak gain Ig at threshold in terms of [y, and the
gain gradient s. Equation (5.9.6) shows that the required peak gain at threshold
(t.e., inversion density) increases sublinearly with the gain gradient.
1/3
where
early with the gain gradient, and is greatest between the fundamental vy = 1 and
the next higher order vy = 2 mode. Equation (5.9.7) is typically accurate to within
a few percent for wide waveguides.
Xo
AX) ~ ne ley _ Ey+1|
5.9.9
do 32 1/3 ( )
~-—s\s—| o& -
no 2fio
modes on the (—) branch may be determined by setting p + wé equal to a zero of
—ry ~ py tw = (1 —~nz)+ue. (5.9.10)
The the additional term wé and the (—) root of w lead to slightly different expres-
2no
straight line, but this time they emanate from the point (7g, my). The angle that
this line makes with the real axis remains 60°, so that it makes an angle of 120°
with the corresponding (+) line. Similarly, the modes are spaced along this line
according to the zeros of the Airy function, with the higher order modes being
more closely spaced together. In this case the y = 1 mode on the (—) branch has
the lowest modal gain of all the modes. We remark that Equation (5.9.11) is not
of the guide. Modes on the (—) branch will not lase, however, so the error is
unimportant from a practical point of view.
almost entirely of Bi(z). It is not possible to obtain simple closed form analytic
expressions for the eigenvalues for these modes. Once again, however, since they
have low modal gains and will not lase until much above threshold, the formulae
are not required.
ure 5.12a shows the mode diagram for the waveguide of Figure 5.9. Figure 5.12b
shows an enlargement of the boxed region of Figure 5.12a. Note that the spacing
of the modes on both the (+) and (—) branches are consistent with the spacing
metric linear tailored gain waveguide were indicated by Figure 5.11. Considering
first the (+) branch, we recall that £ starts from a zero of Ai(z) and terminates
in the sector of exponential decay |Zz| < 7/3. Since the zeros of Ai(z) occur only
along the negative real axis, we see that unlike the eigenmodes of a symmetric or
real index guided structure, the etgenmodes of an asymmetric linear tatlored gain
waveguide do not have nulls tn thetr intensity nearfield patterns.
behavior of Ai(z) off the negative real axis. We expand the sine function in (5.7.1)
¢ € +100 Nor < +Ty= +60 cm!
sof |2 9) [
re 4ok [oO (20m |
a -200 ~T,=-200 em”! C4) b h
= (+) branc
<— 20-F °
6 (Odeo .
_J Or a . ee id ooees >
Oo sy
S -20- (0) branch . _({-) branch
oe ~40F aD)
LJ
= -60
an
| 1 } i | 1 i —
3.41 25 30 35 40 45 50
Re {n}—>
(B) 60F /-
‘ (+), 4
a 40 /
E (+), 4
~ 2Or (+), +
o /
q +
Soo (0) (O),
$—t— tt tT
x — (0),
ro) -) +
S -20b )s \
a (-), *
tl 2
2 \
ae (~), \
-60- On,
l 1 L
Re {7 }——>
showing the (+) , (—) , and (0) branches. (a) overview (b) closeup of boxed region of part (a).
where c =e *4. The relative contribution of each of the two terms to Ai(z) varies
within the region of validity of (5.7.1). If we write z in polar form, z = re*("—$),
near the negative real axis Re{z?/2} = r3/2 cos($(m —6))= —r3/2 sin 36. Above
the negative real axis sin 36 > 0, so that as |z| — oo the second term becomes
exponentially larger than the first. Correspondingly, below the negative real axis
sin 35 < 0, so as |z| — oo the first term becomes exponentially larger than the
second. Along the negative real axis (the Stokes line), both terms are of equal
magnitude but differ in phase, while along the line Zz = +2 (the antiStokes
lines) the second term in (5.10.1) most dominates the contribution due to the
first term. The switching of dominance between the two exponential terms in
Equation (5.10.1) (1.e., Stokes phenomenon) plays a central role in the analysis of
asymmetric linear tailored gain waveguides because it allows the Airy function to
be written as a single term asymptotic expansion in a region of the complex plane
away from the Stokes line along the negative real axis. As will be discussed below,
this is also directly responsible for the single lobed farfield patterns characteristic
of these waveguides.
E,. The usual technique of setting atte) = 0 does not yield an expression giving a
closed form solution for y,. However, x, may be determined from the geometrical
relationships between £ and the level lines of Ai(z). Along £ both the real and
goes through x,, we can make a Taylor expansion of the radicals in the asymptotic
30° — 60° right triangle makes the calculation of x, especially simple for the special case of no
index antiguiding.
maximum when C£ is tangent to the level lines of Ai(z). These level lines are
perpendicular to the lines of constant phase of Ai(z). The antiStokes line asso-
ciated with the principal branch is asymptotic to the line of constant phase (see
Figure 5.8c), which makes an angle of —60° with the negative real axis. The corre-
The quantity pp — x, therefore lies on the Airy function’s antiStokes line. This
by a (real) zero of the Airy function, use Equation (5.3.4) for the complex quantity
w, and make use of a simple geometric construction shown in Figure 5.13, we can
guide x, depends only on the gain gradient and is independent of both the peak
gain [9 and the width @ of the guide. The mode maxima are separated within the
guide by
2ko
the modal gains on the principal branch. If we take ['(z) as the lateral gain profile
and g = (fo —T))/é as the spatial gain gradient, the expressions for the modal
; (5.10.6)
t.e., the modal gain of the mode is given simply by the value of the spatial gain
at the point where the electric field has its peak value. This suggests that, to
Or
pattern.
simplified by making a binomial expansion about v = 0 with v < u:
(5.10.8)
1/4 we 1/4 v\? iz
(u + iv) wu t/ + (2)"| e ‘4
v= (r-xp) || -
for the electric field reduces to .
ot .
E(z) ~ Ai(> +1(z — xy) |w])
~ Bi (F) e (t-xv)?/2w7 gidy(2—xv) ( )
wy = (2r,)
lw| (5.10.11)
by = (ZH)? slay.
v™ lk 2 2rpy
The normalized nearfield intensity I,(z) is hence
Ty(2) ~ oe (0)? / 08 (5.10.12)
manner. The exact (numerical) nearfield intensities and phases for representative
modes on each of the three branches is plotted in Figure 5.15. All of the modes are
oS cE -100+
— -200
(arb. units)
Oo
4 4
Sy
~)
LATERAL DIMENSION
(Lm)
nearfield patterns of representative modes on each of the three branches (c) the correspoinding
phases. Note that all the nearfield patterns are all approximately Gaussian in shape, and that the
phase fronts are nearly linear over the region of appreciable light intensity.
that power flows from the high gain region of a mode towards a low gain region (the
phase fronts of a gain guided mode are curved for a similar reason. (§2-6,3-5(¢))) The
small amount of power which travels in the opposite lateral direction is described
by the term of Equation (5.10.7) which we neglected, and contributes to farfield
emission at an angle —9, off-axis. Thus it is the asymmetry of the lateral gain
profile which is responsible for suppressing the farfield emission at —O, and leads
to the off-axis single lobed farfield patterns characteristic of linear tailored gain
semiconductor lasers. Higher order terms in the expansion of Equation (5.10.8)
lead to slightly asymmetric nearfield patterns with some curvature in the phase
fronts.
direct result of the fact that the path L£ is constrained by the argument of the
cube root of (—1) in Equation (5.5.7) for the high gain modes to make an angle
of —30° with the real axis, and so (see §5.8) the point of peak intensity x, lies
well within a Stokes region. This allowed Ai(z) to be expressed in terms of a
single exponential in Equation (5.10.12). Since a single exponential term has no
zeros (except at infinity) the nearfield pattern cannot have any nulls. The null-less
nearfield patterns are therefore a direct result of the Stokes phenomenon. We will
discuss this point further in §5.11.
the mode patterns of Figure 5.7. However, it should also be noted that the effect
of filamentation($!-2(¢)) must be included in the discussion of the above-threshold
experimental results. The role of filamentation in an asymmetric linear tailored
area lasers considered here are strongly localized near the left edge of the guide,
and are hence relatively unaffected by the gain distribution in the right half of the
guide. The eigenvalues and nearfield patterns of the low order modes on the (+)
branch will not be significantly affected if the the guide is truncated in a region
C= xv + 2wy
V3 rv. ,(2r,)1/4 (5.10.13)
mw VEY yp gh
2 |w| ||
transparency (but above —I,), the optical field of the low order modes will not
extend into that region, and the injected carriers will be wasted. This will tend
to both raise the threshold currents and lower the differential quantum efficiency.
the mode’s farfield pattern. In the Fraunhofer approximation, the farfield pattern
F, (8) is given by the square of the Fourier transform of E,(r) times an obliquity
factor cos6.’ The wide asymmetric tailored gain broad area lasers of interest here
have very narrow farfield patterns near the axis, and thus the obliquity factor may
be ignored. The electric field E,(x) in Equation (5.10.10) is the product of two
F, (8) = Fee xe)?/2u8} x F{ebu(t-xv)} ?
oy _ (180\ dy _ (180\ [frv\1/2 1
ont) = (2) = (FS) ae)
su) = (0) 22 = (180) el
° n J kowy \ © } ko(2r,)1/4
(+) branch.
modes on each branch. We see that the farfield patterns for all modes are
single lobed, and approximately Gaussian in shape, in agreement with Equa-
tion (5.10.12).
order modes on the (+) branch are only slightly displaced from the fundamental.
From (5.9.3) and (5.11.2) we see that the emission angle ©, of the higher order
modes scales approximately as v3, Thus, when gain saturation at high power
operation causes many lateral modes to lase, the beamwidth will degrade gradually,
becoming slightly broader and shifting very slightly in angle. This analytical result
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE @
(pm) (degrees)
tailored gain waveguide (a) intensity nearfield patterns (b) intensity farfield patterns.
eral classes of waveguides: real index guided symmetric (§2.6), real index guided
asymmetric (§4.3 & §5.3), gain guided symmetric (§2.6), and gain guided asym-
metric (§5.5 to §5.11). We have seen that with the exception of the asymmetric
gain waveguide, all the higher order modes of the other waveguides have nulls in
their nearfield patterns and symmetric, multilobed farfield patterns.
tailored gain waveguide are all single lobed and asymmetric about 0° is the result
of some fundamental Fourier Transform relations which relate a mode’s nearfield
patterns to its farfield pattern.
pairs. It is easy to understand why symmetry in the nearfield pattern of either a
real index guided or gain guided waveguide results in a symmetric farfield pattern,
but less easy to understand why an asymmeétrtc real index guided waveguide should
have a symmetric farfield pattern.
states that the power spectrum of a real valued function is symmetric in the
transform plane.? If the indices of refraction of the waveguide are real, so also will
be the electric field, and hence the farfield pattern must be symmetric.
on physical principles. The nulls in a mode’s nearfield pattern result from the
complete destructive interference of two waves of equal amplitude (cf. Equa-
position of many plane waves, each traveling at an angle @ = sin~!k /ko relative
to the axis of the guide. In a real index guided waveguide for which there is no
gain or loss, there can be no power flow perpendicular to the waveguide axis (be-
cause of total internal reflection at an index step, or because of ray bending in a
nonuniform real index media such as the quadratic index fiber) .1! Thus, the mag-
nitude of a Fourier component at +k must be precisely equal to the magnitude
of the corresponding component at —k, where k is the lateral wavevector in the
x direction. The vector sum of the two then has no component perpendicular to
the waveguide axis, so that the sum of the components of all the waves moving in
+z direction must equal the sum of the components of the waves moving in —z
direction. This in turn leads to complete cancellation (t.e., nulls) in the electric
field at isolated points, and explains the nulls in the nearfield pattern of any real
index guided waveguide.
Fourier Transform of the nearfield pattern, the equality condition on the Fourier
components mentioned above implies that the farfield patterns of a real index
guided laser must be symmetric about 9 = 0° — even if the waveguide is asym-
metric. A symmetric farfield pattern implies a single lobed (more precisely, a
null-less) farfield pattern for the fundamental mode (because all Fourier compo-
nents interfere constructively along 8 = 0°). Since the Fourter Transform of a high
order mode must be orthogonal to that of the fundamental mode, the farfield pat-
tern of the high order mode must contain at least one null — t.e., it is multilobed.
We therefore see that the requirement that there be no power flow perpendicular
case of the chirped array of Figure 4.2 or the real ramp waveguide of Figure 5.4.
metric (not necessarily linear) gain induced waveguide is very different. As we
have seen, the electric field is now a complex quantity, and there is in general no
symmetry relation between an asymmetric complex valued function and its Fourier
Transform.? This makes possible the unique nearfield and farfield patterns of the
linear asymmetric tailored gain waveguides.
tion (5.10.1) represents two superimposed traveling waves. Since the exponential
function itself has no zeros, the zeros of the asymptotic representation of Ai(z)
result from the complete cancellation when the two terms of (5.10.1) have equal
magnitude and opposite phase. This can occur only when £ lies along the Stokes
line on the negative real axis and implies that ~ « @ = 0, which in turn can only
occur if there is no gain or loss—t.e., in a real index waveguide. For an asymmet-
ric gain induced waveguide for which ~ # 0, the path of the argument to Ai(z)
will not lie along a Stokes line (negative real axis), and cannot pass through a
zero of Ai(z). As we remarked earlier, £ near the peak in the nearfield intensity
is restricted to lie in a Stokes region, and therefore since w depends only upon
the slope of the gain gradient o and not upon the eigenvalue 7, the higher order
modes of an asymmetric linear gain induced waveguide will not have nulls in the
nearfield patterns.
We showed that the Stokes phenomenon allowed dropping one of the terms in this
equation. This led to the expression (5.10.12) for the electric field as a Gaussian
power would be radiated at —9. The fact that the the latter beam is suppressed
is directly due to the necessity for power to flow from the high gain region of the
mode to the low gain region(35-10) This is reflected mathematically in the tilted
phase fronts arising from the effect of the Stokes phenomenon which comes into
play because of the complex nature of the electric field in a gain guided laser and
the lack of left-right inversion symmetry in the asymmetric linear tailored gain
waveguide.
the Stokes phenomenon come to life in the laboratory every time we increase the
current to a tailored gain broad area laser and see a narrow, single lobed farfield
of a pure gain waveguide with no index variation within the waveguide. In actual
devices, however, the effect of gain created by the carriers in the active region
gives rise to a change in the real part of the refractive index within the wave-
guide through both the free carrier plasma effect and the band-edge effect.!2 In
a semiconductor laser, this relationship between the real and imaginary parts of
the complex index of refraction is usually assumed to be linear. The effect of the
antiguiding parameter b on the eigenmodes may be determined by recalling the
w(b) = w(0) (1 — 1b)1/8
Lu(b) = Lu(0) — Stan7*s
Aside from a slight increase in its length, the principal effect on £ (which is of
length |wé| and makes an angle = Zw with the real axis) is a clockwise rotation
about —r, of gtan™ 1b radians. The expression for the eigenvalues on the (+)
branch becomes slightly more complicated:
1/3
(2)
for b = 2.5, the mode discriminations on the (+) branch are increased by a factor of
about two. The cluster of modes centered about the middle of the guide (1.e., the
(0) branch) is relatively insensitive to the effect of the antiguiding parameter. The
number of modes on the (+) branch actually decreases with increasing 0, consistent
with the notion that index antiguiding should shift the high-gain modes towards
the lower-gain regions of the waveguide.
qualitatively determined with the aid of Figure 5.17 and a simple geometrical
argument. As 6 increases from 0, the angle that £ makes with the real axis
increases. As a result, £ becomes tangent to the level lines of Ai(z) at a point
further removed from z = 0, implying that the position y, of the maximum
intensity of E has shifted towards the low gain side of the waveguide. Furthermore,
X, (b=0)
54°(b=3)
throughout the complex plane. The line £ rotates about —ry, and slightly changes its length.
width of the mode increases as well. Nearfield profiles along the two lines of
Figure 5.17 are compared in Figure 5.18.
proximately constant because the increase in the width of the nearfield is offset
by an increase in the phase curvature. The major effect of antiguiding on the
farfield patterns is to shift ©, to larger angles. ©, is a sensitive function of 6,
and therefore knowledge of the guide parameters (made possible via the halftone
Z -200
7)
Ss
t-
ee)
za
LiJ
Fk
Z l l l l l
= 0 25 50 75 100 125
LATERAL DIMENSION (jm)
mode move towards the center of the waveguide and its width to broaden slightly.
to know the values of the three parameters I'g, ',, and £ which define the parameter
s in Equation (5.5.3). The constant Ig is fixed by the requirement that at threshold
the modal gain of the lasing mode alt) must precisely equal the sum of losses, which
are principally due to the mirrors, and are typically about 40cm~! for a device
250um long. To is then given by inverting Equation (5.9.6). We estimate Ty by
measuring the gradient of the spontaneous emission profile just below threshold.
In an asymmetric tailored gain halftone laser in which the fraction of injecting
gradient of the spontaneous emission pattern, ‘9, and the width of the device @
(which is determined by photolithography) then allows estimation of !'y. Assuming
for simplicity a linear gain-carrier relationship gives Ty ~ —170 + 20cm™!.
antiguiding factor b may be computed numerically. Figure 5.19 plots the theoret-
ically expected emission angles for several values of the antiguiding factor along
with experimental data from halftone asymmetric tailored gain lasers with differ-
ing gain gradients. We find a value 6 = 2.5 +0.5, which is consistent with earlier
number of modes we wanted to be well-confined. If the width of the guide is made
larger than @*, carriers that are injected to the right of 2* will not contribute to
the optical output near threshold, thus leading to unnecessarily high thresholds
and low quantum efficiencies.
above threshold I — J;, versus the optical power emitted per facet for pulsed, low
duty cycle operation of lasers similar to that of Figure 5.2 for several gain gradients
s. The total (two mirror) differential quantum efficiency nezz is also indicated. As
expected, 7ez¢ increases as the width of the laser decreases. We therefore see that
Experimental I=1.21,,
b=3
ed)
oO
Oo 3h
Cc
(op)
wn
ar
LiJ
oO
Cc
O s/6 s/4 s/2 S
beam emission angle © as a function of the antiguiding parameter and spatial gain gradient. The
experimental data points fit 6 = 2.5+0.5, in agreement with previously published results.
240-
t. 7=38%
> = 30%
c = 200+ ae 38%
3 E Ae n= ‘o
oO —
e) 50 75 i00 Oo
= 120
wasted carriers SS
a.
80h
40-
oly,
O 200 400 600 800 1000
I= Tin
various truncated waveguides. The shaded areas represent regions of the waveguide which are
pumped below transparency, and therefore waste carriers. (b) Experimental light-current curves
showing variation of two mirror differential quantum efficiency n as a function of device width.
Truncated lasers have higher differential quantum efficiencies because fewer carriers are wasted;
they are, however, less resistant to the effects of gain saturation at high power.
gradient across the laser, both of which decrease the product wé and shorten the
path £. Equation (5.8.1) shows that, as wé decreases, the contribution of Bi(z)
increases, and so it is no longer possible to use Path Analysis. We therefore
resort once again to the numerical methods of §2.7 to calculate the eigenvalues
and eigenmodes.
tween the fundamental and the higher order modes, and the single lobed nature
of the farfield result from the gain tailoring across the laser waveguide. Above
threshold gain saturation will reduce the gain in the regions of high optical in-
mode, it will add a sidelobe to the v = 2 farfield pattern.
strongly asymmetric tailored gain waveguide, the y = 2 mode has a twin lobed
farfield pattern, and is thus primarly responsible for the degradation of the single
lobed farfield beam. Figure 5.21 presents a numerical study of the effect of a
decrease in the amount of gain tailoring on the single lobed nature of the farfield
pattern by plotting the farfield pattern of the v = 2 mode for various values of the
gain gradient.
also shown. We see the rather remarkable result that even when the gain tailoring
amounts to only oy = 8% of the total possible value, the suppression of the
sidelobe at —@ as a result of the Stokes phenomenon is very good indeed. This
figure shows that a little bit of gain tailoring goes a long way towards bringing
about a single lobed farfield pattern.
implies that this mode will start lasing just above threshold. The actual effects
of gain saturation must be determined by carrying out a simultaneous solution
of the rate equations and the Helmholtz equation.!4 However, we can arrive at a
qualitative feeling for the situation by considering the waveguides of Figure 5.22a.
The unsaturated waveguide is shown in the heavy solid line, and the mode shape
in the light solid line. The increased stimulated emission resulting from the high
intensity regions of the modal field will deplete the carriers, thereby changing the
shape of the gain induced waveguide. We can then roughly approximate the gain
WAVEGUIDE ee v=2
discrimination
(cm7!)
38.8
13.5
60
reo,
20 2.7
FARFIELD ANGLE 6
The figure shows the suppression of the sidelobe of the v = 2 mode by the Stokes phenemonon for
various values of the gain gradient. The number inside the waveguide gives the gain gradient in
cm~!. Notice that even a small amount of gain tailoring is sufficient to suppress the sidelobe.
corresponding to the unsaturated and saturated waveguides are shown in the right
half of the figure. Once again, we consider the vy = 2 mode. We see that a small
w product due to either a truncated guide or a small gain gradient combined
unsaturated PATTERN
i A saturates
(A) aon
Oo
| y=
Y=2
(B) | >
LATERAL DIMENSION FARFIELD ANGLE
tailoring (b) strong gain tailoring. Notice that increased gain tailoring gives better resistance to
gain saturation.
rated guide (light solid line), but this time with a steeper gain gradient. We see
that the corresponding farfield patterns are both essentially single lobed. Wave-
guides with increased gain gradients are therefore less susceptible to the effects of
gain saturation than are guides with smaller gradients.
Carriers
fo)
quanturn efficiency
gain saturation
lobe operation
_ Wasted
i I d
(solid line) truncated waveguide (dashed line). (b) Design tradeoffs.
by experimental study. Nontruncated waveguides (solid line Figure 5.23a) offer
better response to gain saturation and better high power single lobe operation, but
have higher threshold currents and lower differential quantum efficiencies. On the
other hand, truncated waveguides (dashed line, Figure 5.23b) offer lower threshold
currents and higher differential quantum efficiencies but are less resistant to the
gain broad area laser was unsuitable for many applications due to the filamentation
and lateral mode control problems. ($1-2(4)) The filamentation problem was solved
by using an array structure,(81-2(¢)) while the lateral mode control problem was
to the point where the device resembled a broad area laser more than it did an
array.($3-2(¢)) We then demonstrated a tailored gain broad area laser (!) which is
capable of single lobed, high power operation.(85-2)
necessary for high power operation, we have found that the introduction of gain
tailoring makes the array structure superfluous. In fact (as we showed in §4.5)
it may be that since the modulation of the laser’s nearfield pattern introduced
by the array structure increases the power present in the sidelobes and decreases
the ability of the device to operate in a phased locked mode, it may well be
advantageous to consider other structures that resemble broad area lasers more
than they do arrays of individual lasers. In particular, it would be very interesting
to combine our work with gain tailoring with new methods of tailoring the real
part of the refractive index to create tailored index tatlored gain broad area lasers
that would potentially combine some of the benefits of both real index and gain
guiding. Furthermore, in one sense what we have done in this thesis is essentially to
redefine the maximum upper width of a semiconductor laser from 10um — 15um
to perhaps 60um — 100um. One might then speculate about the possibility of
creating arrays of broad area semiconductor lasers!
mentation in a tailored gain broad area laser? Do filaments exist at all, and if so,
why do they not they degrade device performance? Unfortunately, the resolution
an © oO NM FP COCO OHO NA FO ND KF Oo 0 OFA HOH F&F WON KF OC HOH WAN DAO RF YO NHN FE OS
of a One Dimensional Waveguide
(see §2.7)
Caltech 128-95 Pasadena CA 91125 or Polaroid Corp, Cambridge, MA
output value of complex dispersion function cdisp
implicit real *8 (a-h), (o-z)
complex *16 index(nregion) ! complex refractive indicies
real *8 t(nregion) ! thickness of each region
complex *16 cneff, cdisp
complex *16 neff2, arg
complex*16 i / (0.0,1.0d0) /
complex*16 m(2,2), mt(2,2)
neff2 = cneff**2
do 1 L = 1, nregion ! calculate lateral kvectors in each region
k(L) = kO * sqrt (index(L)**2 - nef£2)
1 continue
call interface (m, k, 1) ! calculate propagation matricies
do 2 L = 2, nregion-1i
call freespace (mt, k, t, L)
call mult22r (mt,m) !m=mt *m
call interface (mt, k, L)
call mult22r (mt,m)
2 continue
cdisp = m(2,2)
return
end
implicit real*8 (a-h), (o-z)
complex*i6 mt(2,2), k(L+1)
integer L
mt(1,2) = (1.0 - ct ) / 2.0
mt(2,1) = mt (1,2)
62 implicit real*8 (a-h), (o-z)
94 real*8 x(npoints) ! put x values here starting at
96 real¥*8 xleft, xright ! xleft & ending at
96 !
97 complex*16 e(npoints) ! electric field
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
complex*16 neff2, cdisp, a, b, ekp, ekx
complex*16 mi(2,2), mf(2,2)
complex*16 enorm, enorml, enormr
real*8 mag2
if (abs(cdisp(meff)) .gt. .01) ! set up kvectors & see if root
type *, ‘efield: cdisp <> 0’, neff, cdisp(neff)
tsum = xleft + xright
do 2 kr = 2, nregion-1
tsum = tsum + t (kr)
continue
t(nregion) = 1.1 * xright
dx = taum / (npoints~-1)
xx =~ xleft - dx
xt = xx
kr = 1
a = demplx (0.0d0,0.0d0)
b = demplx (1.0d0,0.0d0)
enorm = 0.0d0 ! normalization
enorml = mag2(b) / dimag ( 2.0d0 * k(1) )
do 200 kp = 1, npoints
xx = xx + dx
xt = xt + dx
x(kp) = xx
if (xt .le. t(kr)) go to 210
! we just passed through
call mult22r (mi, mf)
kr = kr + i
ekp = a * ekx + b / ekx
if ((kr.ne.i).and. (kr.ne.nregion))
enorm=enormt+ekp*conj g(ekp)
e(kp) = ekp
continue
enorm = enorm * dx ! numerical integral
enormr = mag2(a) / (2.0d0 * dimag(k(nregion))) ! analytic integrals
enorm = enorm + enorml + enormr
enorm = aqrt ( enorm )
do 300 kp = 1, npoints
e(kp) = e(kp) / enorm
continue
return
end
& lambda, cwork,npoints)
x(np) real*8 array of x data values for nearfield points
nearfield(np) complex*16 array of nearfield electric field points
np integer number of nearfield points (200 suggested)
theta (nfp) real+4 theta values for farfield
fi(nfp) real*4 farfield intensity pattern
nfp integer number of points in farfield
! (20*«np or 4000 suggested)
cut real*8 threshold value for plot (0.01 suggested)
lambda real*8 wavelength in microns
cwork complex*16 working array
npoints integer number of points in working array
! (10*np or 2000 suggested)
104. cwork(j) = demp1x(0.0d0,0.0d0) ! waveguide
102 cwork(j) = nearfield(1)
103. cwork(j) = demplx(0.0d0,0.0d0)
call fftccm (cwork, npoints, iwork, work) ! complex FFT
do 210 j = 1, npoints/2
save = mag2 (cwork(j+npoints/2))
cwork(j+npoints/2) = demplx ( mag2(cwork(j)) ,0.0d0)
cwork(j) = demplx (save, 0.0d0)
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
222
if (dreal(cwork(j)) .gt. fnorm2) fnorm2 = dreal(cwork(j))
continue
cutoff = cut * fnorm2
do 221 ji = jim, npoints/2
if (dreal(cwork(j1)) .gt. cutoff) go to 222
if (dreal(cwork(npoints-jit1)) .gt. cutoff) go to 222
continue
j2 = npoints - ji +t
do 223 j = j1, j2
l=l1 +1
sf = (1 - nfp/2) * df
sint = sf * lambda
if (sint .gt. 1.0d0) type *, ‘’sint .gt. 1’
cos2 = 1.0d0 - sint+**2
fi(1) = cos2 * dreal (cwork(j))/fnorm2
continue
sf = (1 - nfp/2) * df ! spatial frequency
sint = sf * lambda
if (abs(sint) .gt. 1.0d0) sint = sign (1.0d0,sint)
theta(1) = asin (sint) * radtodeg
continue
return
end
complex*16 cwork(*)
do 20 i = 1, npoints
187, p. 493, 1960.
Rev. Lett., 9, p. 336, 1962.
Phys. Lett., 1, p. 62, 1962.
and H. J. Zeigler, Appl. Phys. Lett., 1, p. 91, 1962.
Operate Continuously at Room Temperature,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 17, p. 109,
1970.
1981.
Resonator Semiconductor Cavity Lasers,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 46(3), pp. 218-
220, 1 February, 1985.
Sci. Instr. (J. Phys E, Series 2), pp. 788-790, 1968.
length Modulation With Branching Waveguide Stripe Injection Lasers,” Appl.
Phys. Lett., 33(7), pp. 616-618, 1 October, 1978.
Laser Array,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 33(12), pp. 1015-1017, 15 December, 1978.
D. R. Scifres, W. Streifer, and R. D. Burnham, “Experimental and Ana-
lytic Studies of Coupled Multiple Stripe Diode Lasers,” J. Quant. Elect.,
QE15 (9), pp. 917-922, September, 1979.
Stripe Quantum Well Injection Lasers,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 41(2), pp. 118-
120, 15 July, 1982.
Lett., 19, p. 170, 1983.
S. Cross, and R. D. Burnham, paper #ThDD3, presented at Integrated and
Guided Wave Optics Conference, Atlanta, Georgia, February 26-28, 1986.
Donald Ackley, “High-Power Multiple-Stripe Injection Lasers With Channel
Guides,” J. Quant. Elect., QE18(11), pp. 1910-1917, November, 1982.
Stripe Laser,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 39(1), pp. 27-29, 1 July, 1981.
Diode Lasers for Supermode Control,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 45(3), pp. 200-
202, 1 August, 1984.
Tailored Gain Phased Array of Semiconductor Lasers,” Appl. Phys. Lett.,
45(7), pp. 722-724, 1 October, 1984.
Yaeli, and T. L. Paoli, “High Power CW Operation of a Phased Array Diode
Laser With Diffraction Limited Output Beam,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 47(11),
pp. 1134-1136, 1 December, 1985.
Oscillation via Gain Tailoring in Broad Area Semiconductor Lasers,” Appl.
Phys. Lett., 47(6), pp. 560-562, 15 September, 1985.
Single Lobed Farfield Patterns,” Elect. Lett., 21(16), pp. 671-673, 1 August,
1985.
ray and Broad Area Lasers,” to be published in J. Quantum Electron.
Gr. Br., p. 309, 1978.
p. 176, 1975.
2 1979.
[40]
[42]
& Sons, New York, p. 226, 1980.
Including the Dependence of the Dielectric Constant with the Injected Carrier
Density,” Opto-Electronics, 4, pp. 257-310, 1972.
Asymmetrical Waveguiding in Very Narrow Conducting Stripe Lasers,” J.
Quant. Elect., QE15(3), pp. 136-141, March, 1979.
erties B:Materials and Operating Characteristics, Academic Press, Inc., New
York, p. B278, 1978.
Graw Hill Book Co., New York, 1978.
tual Phase Locking of Monolithically Integrated Semiconductor Laser Arrays,”
Appl. Phys. Lett., 43(5), pp. 421-423, 1 September, 1983.
Tharldsen, “Index Guided Arrays of Schottky Barrier Confined Lasers,”
Appl. Phys. Lett., 46(5), p. 465, 1 March, 1985.
Appl. Phys., 47(12), pp. 5382-5386, December, 1976.
sorbtion Spectra in AlGaAs Buried Heterostructure Lasers,” J. Appl. Phys.,
51(6), pp. 3042-3050, June, 1980.
Analysis of Phase Locked Semiconductor Laser Array Under Steady State
Conditions,” J. Quant. Elect., QE20(8), pp. 875-879, August, 1984.
Locked Semiconductor Laser Array With Separate Contacts,” Appl. Phys.
Lett., 43(16), pp. 521-523, 15 September, 1983.
demic Press, New York, 1977. |
and Asymmetrical Waveguiding in Very Narrow Conducting Stripe Lasers,”
J. Quant. Elect., QE15($), pp. 136-141, March, 1979.
Inc., New York, 1974.
York, 1982.
[13]
[14]
Chapter 2
erties B:Materials and Operating Characteristics, Academic Press, Inc., New
York, p. A45, 1978.
& Sons, New York, p. 196, 1980.
and Asymmetrical Waveguiding in Very Narrow Conducting Stripe Lasers,”
J. Quant. Elect., QE15(3), pp. 136-141, March, 1979.
1981.
Winston, New York, p. 352, 1985.
tual Phase Locking of Monolithically Integrated Semiconductor Laser Arrays,”
Appl. Phys. Lett., 43(5), pp. 421-423, 1 September, 1983.
Tharldsen, “Index Guided Arrays of Schottky Barrier Confined Lasers,”
Appl. Phys. Lett., 46(5), p. 465, 1 March, 1985.
[18]
Diode Lasers,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 43(12), 15 December, 1983.
1979.
Yariv, “Fundamental Mode Oscillation of a Buried Ridge Waveguide Laser
Array,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 45(8), pp. 834-835, 15 October, 1984.
Induced Waveguiding in Stripe Geometry Diode Lasers,” J. Quant. Elect.,
QE14(6), pp. 418-427, June, 1978.
Tech. J., 52(6), July-August, 1973.
Tharldsen, “Index Guided Arrays of Schottky Barrier Confined Lasers,”
Appl. Phys. Lett., 46(5), p. 465, 1 March, 1985.
formance Index Guided Phase-locked Semiconductor Laser Arrays,” Elect.
Lett., 21(8), pp. 324-325, 11 August, 1985.
York, pp. 275-282, 1982.
Inc., New York, Chapter 2 1974.
Graw Hill Book Co., New York, 1978.
York, p. 93, 1970.
ston, New York, p. 413, 1985.
Elect., QE9(9), p. 919, September, 1973.
Absorption Spectra in AlGaAs Buried Hetrostructure Lasers,” J. Appl. Phys.,
51/6), pp. 3042-3050, June, 1980.
John Wiley & Sons, New York, p. 1100, 1972.
Press Division, John Wiley & Sons, New York, p. 206, 1982.
Inc., New York, p. 19, 1974.
J. Lightwave Tech., LT-3(5), p. 1135, October, 1985.
1979.
and Hall, New York, Chapter 24, 1983.
Locked Semiconductor Laser Array With Separate Contacts,” Appl. Phys.
Lett., 43(6), pp. 521-523, September, 1983.
anism of Gain-Guided Integrated Semiconductor Laser Arrays,” Appl. Phys.
Semiconductor Lasers,” Optics Letters, 9, pp. 125-127, April, 1984.
Locked Injection Laser Arrays,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 44(8), 1 February,
1984.
lytic Studies of Coupled Multiple Stripe Diode Lasers,” J. Quant. Elect.,
QE15 (9), pp. 917-922, September, 1979.
Diode Lasers for Supermode Control,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 45(3), pp. 200-
202, 1 August, 1984.
tual Phase Locking of Monolithically Integrated Semiconductor Laser Arrays,”
Appl. Phys. Lett., 43(5), pp. 421-423, 1 September, 1983.
Tailored Gain Phased Array of Semiconductor Lasers,” Appl. Phys. Lett.,
45(7), pp. 722-724, 1 October, 1984.
Oscillation via Gain Tailoring in Broad Area Semiconductor Lasers,” Appl.
Phys. Lett., 47(6), pp. 560-562, 15 September, 1985.
& Sons, New York, p. 346, 1980.
tual Phase Locking of Monolithically Integrated Semiconductor Laser Arrays,”
Elect. Lett., 21(14), p. 3, 4 July, 1985.
Yaeli, and T. L. Paoli, “High Power CW Operation of a Phased Array Diode
Laser With Diffraction Limited Output Beam,” Appl. Phys. Lett., 47(11),
Scientists and Engineers, McGraw-Hill, New York, pp. 115-116, 1978.
William Streifer, Don R. Scifres, and Robert D. Burnham, “Analysis of Gain-
Induced Waveguiding in Stripe Geometry Diode Lasers,” J. Quant. Elect.,
QE14(6), pp. 418-427, June, 1978.
Single Lobed Farfield Patterns,” Elect. Lett., 21(16), pp. 671-673, 1 August,
1985.
pp. 42-51, 1 February, 1985.
erties B:Materials and Operating Characteristics, Academic Press, Inc., New
York, p. A75, 1978.
Graw Hill Book Co., New York, p. 122, 1978.
1979.
p. 109, 1975.
& Sons, New York, p. 535, 1980.
Analysis of Phase Locked Semiconductor Laser Array Under Steady State
Conditions,” J. Quant. Elect., QE20(8), pp. 875-879, August, 1984.
but they often pass away without noticing the
fact that the memory of a really good person
always lives. It is impressed upon the next
generation, and is transmitted again to the
children. Is not that an immortality worth
striving for?
Memoirs of a Revolutionist